Document No.

IN-EN-MD-001
Page 1 of 37
Technical Specification Rev. 3_Q4-24

Date 28-Oct-24

1 General Requirements
1.1 All definitions of a Contractor’s scope of work, including but not limited to the technical specifications and description of standards of a Grid-Connected Solar Photovoltaic System (Roof Top) are documented herewith.
The Contractor should be catering for the Design, Supply, Installation and Commissioning of a Grid-Connected Solar Photovoltaic System. The mentioned technical specification listed herewith should be considered for the procurement of the required material, also
1.2
the recommended method needs to be considered while installing the plant,
The correct assessment of the Scope of work shall be contractor’s responsibility, completely covering the obligations, responsibility and workmanship, provided in this Bid enquiry whether implicit or explicit. The contractor shall inspect all the locations before
1.3
filing submitting the proposal.
1.4 The Contractor should be responsible for the supply of equipment and execution of installation as per the approved drawing and methods
1.5 The approval should be required to conduct the supply and execution work In-case of any variation and deviation,
1.6 In receiving and assessing this document, it should be the Contractor’s responsibility to comply with local regulations

2 Definitions
2.1 “Array” means a collection of electrically connected photovoltaic (PV) modules.
2.2 “Contractor” means the recipient of this document working with BECIS for the work as specified herewith.
2.3 “BOM” means the Bill of Materials.
“Commissioning” shall mean the installation of full Contracted Capacity and satisfactory, continuous and uninterrupted operation of all the equipment / system as specified after all necessary initial tests, checks and adjustments required at the Site for a period of at
2.4
least [72 hours] to the satisfaction of the Owner.
2.5 “Drawings” means collectively all the accompanying general drawings as well as all detailed drawings in relation to the Project, which may be used from time to time.
2.6 “Final Acceptance Test” shall mean such tests as may be required to be conducted by the successful Contractor and approved by the Owner in terms of the Definitive Agreements.
2.7 “Fixed Tilt Array” means a PV Array set in at a fixed angle with respect to horizontal.
2.8 “Grid” shall meal the distribution network laid down by the state utility for supply of electricity
“GTP”/ “Guaranteed Technical Parameters” shall mean a document confirming all technical and physical parameters of a component or system in relation to the project, which should be stamped and signed by the manufacturer / supplier of the particular item and
2.9
the Contractor.
2.10 “IEC” means International Electro-technical Commission; that is the world's leading organization that prepares and publishes International Standards for all electrical, electronic and related technologies.
2.11 “Inverter” / “Power Conditioning Unit (PCU)” means in relation to a PV system, an inverter that converts DC power from the PV Array to AC power compatible with the utility and AC loads.
2.12 “Irradiance” means the solar power incident on a surface, usually expressed in kilowatts per square meter. Irradiance multiplied by time equals Insolation.
2.13 “Kilowatt (kW)” means one thousand watts a unit of power.
2.14 “Kilowatt Hour (kWh)” means one thousand watt-hours, a unit of energy. Power multiplied by time equals energy.
2.15 “Metering System” shall mean the points where metering should be provided for the Project for the purpose of recording of delivered energy of the Project.
2.16 “Maximum Power Point (MPP)” means the point on the current-voltage (I-V) curve of a module under illumination, where the product of current and voltage is maximum.
2.17 “Maximum Power Point Tracker (MPPT)” means the power conditioning unit that automatically operates the PV-generator at its MPP under all conditions.
2.18 “Operation and Maintenance”/ “O&M” shall mean the Operation and Maintenance of the Plant after successful commissioning of the Plant.
2.19 “Owner” shall mean BECIS
2.20 “Performance Guarantees” shall mean the guarantees to be provided by the successful Contractor to the Owner as may be stipulated in the Definitive Agreements.
2.21 “Solar Photovoltaic Modules / SPV” shall mean the Crystalline technology modules.
“Project Completion” / “Completion” shall mean completion of Solar Power Plant and all the associated civil and electrical works, including but not limited to Walkway, Lifeline, Ladder, Handrail, to the satisfaction of the Owner, as may be more particularly
2.22
described in the Definitive Agreements.
2.23 “Project Manager” means the Project Manager deployed by the Owner.
2.24 “Reactive Power” means the sine of the phase angle between the current & voltage waveforms in an AC system.
2.25 “Solar Power System” shall mean the grid connected Solar Photovoltaic system to be developed by the Owner.
2.26 “Tilt Angle” means the angle of inclination of a solar collector measured from the horizontal.
2.27 "Injection point/Evacuation point/Point of common coupling" refers to physical electrical connection of solar plant to utility grid
2.28 "SMB" refers to String combiner box provided as per Owners requirements & inverter OEM
2.29 "PLCC"refers to power line carrier communication used between electrical substation using Wave trap & coupling capacitor.
2.30 "Tracker "refers to complete solar tracking system including structure, rotating mechanism & power supply used to adjust face of solar module as per Sun path each day every season.
2.31 "Switchyard "refers to outdoor assembly of switchgear and/or transformer mounted on foundations/plinths with provision for electrical connections including earthing& surge protections.

3 System Design Criteria

3.1 The system should be designed and constructed for a minimum functional life of 30 years.
3.2 The system should be designed and constructed in a manner to optimize generation considering parasitic losses due to PV module shading, soiling, wire losses, inverter losses, switchgear losses, and transformer losses (if applicable).
3.3 All structures must be designed in accordance with all applicable codes and standards.
Voltage insulation levels, grounding, equipment interrupting, continuous current capacities, circuit protection and mechanical strengths of structure and the roof / building should be selected and coordinated in accordance with calculations and the recommendations
3.4
of the IEC and other local applicable codes and standards as noted.
3.5 Photovoltaic Modules, String Inverter, Plant Monitoring equipment, Electrical panels/encloser, and installed switchgear shall conform to the manufacturer’s published data sheet(s).
3.6 Initial design proposal will be shared by EPC for approval of Owner. EPC will share detailed engineering & BoM after approval of initial design for Owners approval.
3.7 The PV power plant shall be designed for full output at particular site's full range of solar irradiance & ambient temperature.
3.8 All components and equipment shall be selected considering easy maintenance, simple and quick diagnosis and trouble free long life. Similar or identical equipment s & accessories to be selected for equivalent functions.
3.9 The hot dip galvanisation thickness for mild steel material should be 85 micron unless mentioned separately

4 Relevant Standards
The Contractor’s design, equipment, material, and installation shall comply with the latest revisions and amendments of the applicable international and local codes, regulations and standards including but not limited, those listed below. All other applicable international and
local codes, regulations and standards shall also be taken into account
Sr.No Name of Specification Code Reference
4.1 Specification for High-Voltage Alternating-Current Circuit-Breakers IS 13118
4.2 Guide for testing of circuit breakers with respect to out-of-phase switching IS 9135
4.3 Current transformers: Part 1 General requirements IS 2705 PART-1
4.4 Current transformers: Part 2 Measuring current transformers IS 2705 PART-2
4.5 Application Guide for Current Transformer IS 4201
4.6 Lightning Arresters for Alternating Current Systems - Specification - Part 3 : Metal Oxide Lightning Arresters Without Gaps IS 3070 PART-3
4.7 Methods for Partial Discharge Measurements IS 6209
4.8 Electrical relays for power systems protection: Part 0 General introduction and list of parts IS 3231 : Part 0 : 1986
4.9 General requirement for Switch gear and Control gear for voltage not exceeding 1 KV IS 4237
4.10 Degree of Protection provided by enclosures for low voltage switchgear and control gear IS 2147
4.11 AC Contactors for voltages not exceeding 1000 volts IS 2959
4.12 Colours for ready mixed paints and enamels IS 5
4.13 PVC insulation and sheath of electric cables IS 5831
4.14 Crosslinked polyethylene insulated PVC sheathed cables: Part 1 For working voltage up to and including 1100 V IS 7098 : Part 1 : 1988
4.15 Drums for electric cables IS 10418
4.16 Porcelain insulators for overhead power lines with a nominal voltage greater than 1000 V IS 731
4.17 Characteristics of string insulator units IS 3188
Specification for Low-Voltage Switchgear and Control gear Assemblies - Part 3 Particular Requirements for Equipment Where Unskilled Persons IS 8623 : Part 3 : 1993
4.18
have Access for Their Use IEC Pub 439-3 : 1990
4.19 Electrical Accessories - Circuit Breakers for Over Current Protection for Household and Similar Installations (MCCB/MCB) IS 8828
4.20 Code of practice for earthing IS 3043
4.21 Code of practice for fire safety of buildings (general): Electrical installations IS 1646
4.22 Code of practice for fire fighting of buildings IS 1647
4.23 Recommended Practice for Hot-Dip Galvanizing of Iron and Steel IS 2629
4.24 General Construction in Steel-Code of Practice IS800:2007
4.25 Code of Practice for use of cold formed slight gauge steel structural members in General building constructions IS801:1975
4.26 Dimensions of Hot Rolled Steel Beam, Columns , Channel, & Angle Sections IS808
4.27 Hot Rolled Medium & High Strength Structural Steel-Specifications IS2062
4.28 Hot Rolled Carbon Steel Sheet & Strip Specifications IS1079
4.29 Cold Reduced Low Carbon Steel Sheet & Strips IS513
4.30 Steel Tubes for Structural Purposes- Specifications IS1161
Code of Practice for Use of Metal Arc Welding for General Construction in Mild Steel IS816
Document No. IN-EN-MD-001
Page 2 of 37
Technical Specification Rev. 3_Q4-24

Date 28-Oct-24

General Requirements
4.31 Code of Practice for Use of Metal Arc Welding for General Construction in Mild Steel IS816
4.32 Mechanical Properties of Corrosion Resistant Stainless steel fasteners BS EN ISO:3506
4.33 Criteria for Earthquake Resistant Design of Structure IS1893
4.34 Code of Practice For Design Loads (Other than Earthquake) for Buildings & Structures IS875 (Part 1 to 5)
4.35 Design & Construction of Pile Foundations-Code of Practice IS2911
4.36 Design & Construction of Bored Cast In Situ Piles Founded on Rocks -Guidelines IS14593
4.37 Method of Test for Soils IS2720
4.38 Plain & Reinforced Concrete- Code of Practice IS456
4.39 Solar Plant Performance Test IS/IEC 61724:1998
4.40 DC array design requirements (DC array wiring, electrical protection devices, switching & earthing provisions) IEC 62548:2016
4.41 DC cable EN 50618 H1Z2Z2K
4.42 Soil resistivity measurement by Wenner method ASTM G 57/IS3043/IEEE Std 80-2000 &IEEE 81 -1983
4.43 ESEAT (Early streamer emission air terminal )based direct stroke lightning protection system NFC 17-102:2011/UNE 21186:2011
4.44 Power transformer IS2026,IS 11171,IS335 IEC 60726 &CBIP
4.45 Epoxy grey shade IS:05
Ingress Protection standard is used to define the levels of sealing effectiveness of electrical enclosures against intrusion from foreign bodies such as
4.46 EN 60529
tools, dirt and moisture.
4.47 SPD for Low voltage electrical panels IEC 61643 & IEC 60364-4&5 / UL 1449
4.48 Seismic compliances of switchgears up to 36kV IEEE -693/2005 EN60068-3/1993
4.49 High voltage switchgear & control gear IEC 62271,IEC 60255
4.50 Low voltage switchgear ,power distribution boards, control gear assemblies(Comprehensive SAT & FAT) EN/IEC 61439-1,2,3,4,5,6
4.51 Instrument transformers (Part1 current transformer,Part2 voltage transformer, low power current transducers) IEC 61869-2&3,IEC 60044-8
4.52 Earthing system design of utility scale (5MW or more )solar power plant IEEE 2728-2020
High speed protection applications (numerical relays)& communication standard for integration of protections, control, measurement & monitoring in
4.53 IEC 61850
substations
4.54 AC Power cables with extruded insulation with accessories IEC 60502-2,BS 6622,BS7835
4.55 Medium voltage surge arrestors IEC 60099-4,IEC 62848-1
4.56 Electrical Transmission lines
IS:5613, C B I & P publication no.268,
4.56.1 Code of practice for design, installation & manual
Indian electricity rules, ASCE Manual-72
4.56.2 Specification for zinc IS 209,ISO/R/752,ASTM B6,BS:3436
4.56.3 Specification for galvanized steel barbed wire IS278,ASTM A131
4.56.4 Concrete reinforcement ,OPC, Aggregates IS432,IS8112,IS456,IS1786
4.56.5 Structural steel IS :800 ,CSA 6.1, IS:802, IS:808,ASCE 52,IEC 826 ,BS 8100 ,IEC 652,IS:8500,IS:7215,
IS:1367,IS:1363,IS:2016, ISO/R887,IS:3063,DIN-127 1970,ASTM IS:3063, IS:3757 ,IS:6610,
4.56.6 Threaded steel fasteners, plain washers, heavy washers, high strength structural nuts, Hex bolts, step bolts, transmission tower bolts
IS:6623, IS:6639, IS:10238, IS:12427
4.56.7 Electroplated coatings for zinc on iron & steel IS:1573
4.56.8 Criteria for earthquake resistant design of structures IS:1893
4.56.9 Design loads other than earthquake for buildings & structures IS:875
4.56.10 Hot dip galvanized coatings, Zinc coatings IS:2629,IS:2633,ASTM A123,CSA G164, IS:4759,IS:5358,IS:6745,IS:1852
4.56.11 Design & construction of foundations for transmission line towers & poles IS:4091
4.56.12 Earthing purpose MS Flat 50mm*6mm IS:2026

5 EHS Requirement
5.1 General communication & fire safety requirements
5.1.1 Fire safety needs for the asset to be verified at the design level & confirm with the costumer for any gap closure to meet with compliance
5.2 Environment, social, health and safety (ESHS) requirements
5.2.1 To follow the environmental, social, health and safety (ESHS) requirements are binding for the contractor and his subcontractor for executing works at the project site. The contractor must provide an ESHS Management plan.
5.2.2 Following mandatory requirements must be fulfilled.
a The contractor shall have a management team in place which is able to fulfil all requirements of the project
b The contactor shall continuously monitor and improve health and safety at site.
c The contactor and sub-contactors proposal should clearly describe how it will achieve the projects ESHS requirements and list the costs for providing related services.
5.3 Operational requirements
5.3.1 Documented plan to manage maintenance to be developed based on design for handover.
5.3.2 The contactor shall comply with the applicable national laws on environment, health, safety and social and any relevant standards, including the owners requirements.
5.3.3 The contactor and sub-contactors shall be able to manage the ESHS risks of the project and to achieve requirements on ESHS in compliance with national regulations and in according to owners requirements
5.3.4 The contactor (and sub-contractors depending on the extent of their scope of work) will carry out a risk assessment to identify ESHS priorities and develop ESHS management plans to ensure achievements of the required standards
5.3.5 The contactor will implement applicable owners & off takers ESHS management systems and procedures and ensure that all staff are properly trained in the applicable procedures and management plans
The contactor and sub-contactors will ensure that the necessary resources (E,g budget, personnel, equipment, etc.) are available to achieve the required ESHS standards. Importantly, the contractor shall provide suitable personal protective equipment’s.
5.3.6
(PPE) for all site staff, and safety instruction signs at each area of construction site.
5.3.7 The ESHS Management plans shall be reviewed and approved by the owner/ owners engineer before execution.
The contractor (and sub-contractor depending on the extent of their scope of work) will monitor and report ESHS performance, this will include at least weekly and monthly reporting to the owner and daily reporting on site. Specific event reports will
5.3.8
also be required outside of the normal reporting period if applicable (e.g. accidents shall be reported immediately) and the owners shall be given access (and information) to carry out an ESHS audit at the site if needed.
5.3.9 Plant design must be "VERIFIED" with the owner to ensure safety of the installation
5.4 On-Site Management

5.4.1 Contractors will be required to undertake initial internal HSE & Labour related induction training including HIRA, Emergency Response plan, Height Safety, Electrical Safety etc. where their expectations and responsibilities will be detailed.

5.4.2 Medical fitness certificate relevant to the nature of work including vertigo check for working at heights to be submitted for all contract workman engaged in high-risk activities
5.4.3 Contractors must actively participate in site HSE meetings, training & awareness programs as necessary.
5.5 HSE Requirements by Contractors (To be part of Contract Documents)
5.5.1 General
5.5.1.1 All contractors are to maintain compliance to the applicable HSE and Labour laws of the land, the BECIS E&S Policy and terms listed below as applicable to the nature of the work.

5.5.2 Housekeeping
5.5.2.1 Contractors shall ensure that their work area is kept clean, tidy, and free from debris. The work area must be cleaned daily.
5.5.2.2 The disposal of waste shall be done by the contractor at off taker existing facility via legally acceptable disposal methods.

5.5.2.3 All equipment, materials and vehicles shall be stored in an orderly manner. Access to emergency equipment, exits, telephones, safety showers, eye washes, fire extinguishers, pull boxes, fire hoses, etc. shall not be blocked or disturbed.

5.5.3 Tools, Equipment and Machinery

The Contractor must ensure that all tools & equipment provided for use during the Work is

▪Suitable for its intended use.

5.5.3.1
▪Safe for use, maintained in a safe condition and where necessary inspected to ensure this remains the case (any inspection must be carried out by a competent person and records shall be available).
▪Used only by people who have received adequate information, instruction, and training to use the tool or equipment.
▪Always provided with Earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCBs) when using electric power cords. Use of electrical tape for temporary repairs is prohibited.

5.5.4 Working at Height

Any Work undertaken where there is a risk of fall and injury is working at height.
5.5.4.1
For any Contractor Personnel working at height, contractors shall provide fall prevention resources as necessary and fall protection requirements as per highlighted in the project specific HIRA
5.5.5 Fall Prevention System
5.5.5.1 Fall prevention systems (e.g., fixed guardrails, scaffolds, lifelines, walkways, skylight shields, elevated work platforms etc.) must provide protection for areas with open sides, including exposed floor/ roof openings.

5.5.6 Fall Protection Systems

5.5.6.1 Where fall protection systems are used then the Contractor must ensure the following is applied:
Document No. IN-EN-MD-001
Page 3 of 37
Technical Specification Rev. 3_Q4-24

Date 28-Oct-24

General Requirements
5.5.7 Scaffolding
5.5.7.1 All scaffolds shall be subjected to a documented inspection by a competent person and clearly marked prior to use.
5.5.7.2 The footings or anchorage for scaffolding shall be sound, rigid, and capable of carrying the maximum intended load without settling or displacement. All scaffolding materials should be minimum of MS tubular type.
Guardrails and toe-boards shall be installed on all open sides and ends of scaffold platforms. Scaffolds shall be provided with an access ladder or equivalent safe access. Contractor Personnel shall not climb or work from scaffold
5.5.7.3
handrails, mid-rails, or brace members.
5.5.8 Stairways and Ladders

Ladders should only be used for light duty, short-term work, or access in line with the below and the Site Requirements.

a. Fabricated ladders are prohibited unless design approved and commissioned and is part of site safety infrastructure permanent construction.
b. Temporary Ladders will be secured to keep them from shifting, slipping, being knocked, or blown over.
5.5.8.1 c. Temporary Ladders will never be tied to facility services piping, conduits, or ventilation ducting.
d. Temporary Ladders will be lowered and securely stored at the end of each workday
e. Temporary Ladders shall be maintained free of oil, grease, and other slipping hazards
f. Temporary Ladders will be visually inspected by a competent person and approved for use before being put into service. Each user shall inspect ladders visually before using.
g. Temporary Ladders with structural defects shall be tagged "Do Not Use," immediately taken out of service, and removed from the Site by the end of the day

5.5.9 Roof Work/Access

5.5.9.1 Roof work and access to roofs must not be undertaken without prior authorization from BECIS. All roof work will need to adhere to HSE design elements which are to be signed off by the HSE manager.

5.5.10 Overhead Work

5.5.10.1 A secure exclusion zone shall be maintained by Contractor below overhead work to prevent access. It is forbidden to work beneath a suspended load.

5.5.11 Lifting Operations

5.5.11.1 Cranes and Hoisting Equipment

Contractors shall operate and maintain cranes and hoisting equipment in accordance with manufacturers’ specifications and legal requirements like "Third Party Inspection - TPI" as per factory act & other vehicle
5.5.11.1.1
document such as Registration Certificate, Pollution certificate & insurance.
5.5.11.1.2 Contractor must check and hire cranes and hoists operators with appropriate licenses to operate the same.

5.5.11.2 Lifting Equipment and Accessories

All lifting equipment / accessories e.g., slings, chains, webbing, chain blocks, winches, jacks etc. shall be indicated with their safe working load, have an identification number visible on the unit and be inspected and
5.5.11.2.1 tested in accordance with legal requirements as per section 29 of Factory Act.
Damaged equipment / accessories and equipment shall be tagged “out of use” and immediately decommissioned and removed from Site.

5.5.12 Lockout Tag out (“LOTO”)

5.5.12.1 Prior to performing work on machines or equipment, the Contractor shall ensure that they are familiar with LOTO and Permit to Work procedures applicable and that all relevant Contractor Personnel receive the necessary training.

5.5.13 Barricades
Floor/skylight openings, stairwells, platforms, and walkways, and trenching where a person can fall any distance shall be adequately barricaded and where necessary, well lit. Where there is a risk of injury from a fall then rigid barriers
5.5.13.1
must be used.
5.5.13.2 Barricades must also be used to prevent personnel entering an area where risk of injury is high e.g., during overhead work activity or electrical testing etc. Such barricading must provide clear visual warning
5.5.14 Electrical Safety
Prior to undertaking any work on live electrical equipment, the Contractor must obtain a Permit to Work from BECIS. No live work is to be done and if deviation is required it must be approved by the Project Manager and EHS
5.5.14.1
Manager. Any control measures highlighted shall be implemented prior to work commencing
The below measures will be taken as a minimum

5.5.14.2 a) Work practices must protect against direct or indirect body contact by means of tools or materials and be suitable for work conditions and the potential voltage level.
b) Energized panels will be closed and secured after normal working hours and whenever they are unattended. Temporary wiring will be de-energized when not in use.
c) Only licensed electrical Contractor Personnel may enter substations and/or transformer areas and only after being specifically authorized by BECIS.
5.5.15 Hot Works
A Permit to Work must be obtained from BECIS prior to any hot works (welding, grinding, open flame work). Suitable fire extinguishing equipment shall be accessible and functional. Objects to be welded, cut, or heated shall be
5.5.15.1 moved to a designated safe location, or, if they cannot be readily moved, all movable fire hazards in the vicinity shall be taken to a safe place. Personnel working around or below the hot works shall be protected from falling or flying
objects.
5.5.15.2 Prior to the use of temporary propane or resistance heating devices approval must be obtained from BECIS

5.5.16 Trenching, Excavating, Drilling and Concreting

A Permit to Work must be obtained from BECIS and all underground lines, equipment and electrical cables shall be identified and located prior to beginning the work. The Contractor shall assign a competent Contractor Personnel for
5.5.16.1
all trenching and excavation work.
Safe means of access and egress shall be in trench excavations. Daily inspections shall be conducted by a competent Contractor Personnel for evidence of a situation that could result in possible cave-ins, indications of failure of
5.5.16.2
protective systems or other hazardous conditions.
5.5.16.3 Physical barriers shall be placed around or over trenches and excavations. Flashing light barriers shall be provided at night as warning.

5.5.17 Environmental Requirements Waste Management

The Contractor is responsible to collect all waste generated by the work being done on the Site. The Contractor must dispose of the waste in off taker existing facility. The waste disposal route shall be documented and made available
5.5.17.1
for BECIS to review at any time and may be subject to BECIS’s prior approval. Wastes (includes rinse from washing of equipment, PPE, tools, etc.) are not to be poured into sinks, drains, toilets, or storm sewers, or onto the ground.

5.5.18 Spills
5.5.18.1 The Contractor is responsible for the provision of adequate spill kits/protection and the clean-up and disposal costs arising from such spills.

5.5.19 Emissions
5.5.19.1 Appropriate PPE aligned to the risk levels should be used for hot work activities.

5.5.20 First Aid and Medical Fitness

5.5.20.1 The Contractor shall ensure a trained first aider is always part of the project team and proposed work staff are with valid medical clearances as the nature of the work requires.

5.5.21 Social Accountability

The contractor should ensure that key elements with regard to labour welfare are aligned to comply at a minimum to country legislations. Secure and hygienic dormitory arrangements, working hours, overtime, timely remuneration via
5.5.21.1 pay stubs and collective bargaining rights are respected. BECIS adheres to SA 8000 principles and encourages contractors to align with key elements stated in the standard. BECIS does not support any form of child labour, forced
labour or any form of harsh or inhumane disciplinary practices.
5.5.22 EPC Safety Officer deployment

EPC must deploy full time safety officer for all solar rooftop projects above 1MW or roof tilt more than 11 degree or if required by off taker. All other projects of smaller capacity should have EHS officers which need not be dedicated
to any one site however accountable for safety practices for site activities.
5.5.22.1
A responsibility and training matrix should be developed for each operating company under BECIS. The relevant training to raise awareness, gain commitment and teach people the knowledge and skills they need to implement and
deliver the ESMS as per the responsibility matrix should be provided and endorsed by senior management.

5.5.23 PPE details & specs

Sr. No PPE Type Standard Make (Recommended)

1 Safety Helmet EN 397 Karam, Udoygi, Viraj/UFS

2 Safety Shoe IS-15298 Karam, Udoygi, Tiger, JCB
3 Reflective Vest Double strip Reflecting vest Any make
4 Climbing Gloves Rubber dotted Cotton Safety Any make
5 Material handling Gloves cut resistant nylon made EN 388 Karam, Udoygi, Viraj, UFS
6 Electrical Gloves Class 0 with 0.5 mm thickness 1000 V Honeywell

7 Full Body Harness Double Lanyard with Shock absorber EN 361, EN 358, EN 813, EN 355 Karam, Udoygi,

8 Eye protection EN 166:2001 Karam, Udoygi, Viraj

9 Barricading Tape Red white strip tape Any make
10 Welding Helmet CE EN166, EN170, ANSI Z87+. Karam, Udoygi, Viraj
11 Welding Gloves IS-2573:1986 standard Karam, Udoygi, Viraj
12 1 Kit per 20 person
First aid kit Any make
13 IS 13115
14 Fire extinguisher ABC type 6 Kg DCP Grap Fire
15 Electrical mat IS 15652 : 2006 Any make
16 LOTO Lock & Tag ( min 2 no.) -- Any make
17 Welding blanket Heat-resistant fiberglass fabrics 2mm thickness Any make
18 30 mtr rope length Rescue Kit -- Karam/Udoygi/UFS
Document No. IN-EN-MD-001
Page 4 of 37
Technical Specification Rev. 3_Q4-24

Date 28-Oct-24

General Requirements 19 Chemical Spill kit -- Any make

20 Mask N95 and R95 and general 3 ply masks Any Make
N.B- Other PPE as per work needed to be provided by EPC based on the risk assessment for the project.

5.5.24 UV resistant Flex Board made Signages

Sr. No Name Size

1 Emergency Assembly Point A3 Size

2 Emergency Exit A5 Size
3 Emergency Response 3 X 2 (Length X Height) (Unit= Feet)
4 Fire Extinguisher A3 Size
5 First Aid Box A5 Size
6 Waste Disposal A5 Size
7 Plant Safety Measures 3 X 2 (Length X Height) (Unit= Feet)
8 Your Responsibilities A3 Size
9 Site Safety Layout A3 size

5.5.25 Third Party Training

5.5.25.1 EPC must give training to minimum 2 persons about "Rope Access Rescue" and First Aid Practice with certification by third party agency. 1 trained person must be present at site at all times.

6 Design, Engineering and Construction

6.1 PVSyst Design
6.1.1 Design simulation shall only be acceptable in the form of a report generated by the latest version of PV Syst software. The project working files are to be included as part of the submission package

6.1.2 The simulation of the system shall use the latest weather data with the appropriate geographical coordinates and name of the region of installation. The range of data should be a set of a 10-year average solar radiation from a reliable source.

The Contractor may alternatively propose to use a set of weather data imported as ACSII format into PVSyst from other sources like SolarGIS. Conditions apply to the subjected acceptance of the weather data source, which includes but not limited to,
6.1.3
strong reliability and reputability of source (i.e. data provision from local authorities), or the Contractor’s justifications of collected real data from properly maintained existing systems.
The Contractor shall generate a PVSyst simulation report based on the proposed set of weather data, the system capacity, module-string configurations with selected Solar Modules and Inverters, azimuth (orientation) and tilt of the solar arrays and the
6.1.4
guidelines for the complete report which are stipulated as follows
6.1.4.1 Minima and maxima values of ambient temperatures, operating temperatures and albedo factors are correctly defined as per the historical site location data.
6.1.4.2 Separate sub-systems should be assigned to arrays without the same tilt angle or azimuth angle
6.1.4.3 Soiling losses should be accounted for Selected Power Nominal Ratios (PNom) should be verified that there should be no overloading on the Inverters beyond that which the manufacturer will warrant
6.1.4.4 Solar Module parameters on shunt and series resistance, annual degradation rates, power quality loss and mismatch loss figures are reliably obtained from the manufacturer
6.1.4.5 Inverter parameters on efficiency, input and output limits, de-rating and MPPT concept are reliably obtained from the manufacturer
6.1.4.6 The shading analysis model or shading scene need to be constructed/defined as per the exact site condition.

6.1.4.7 Losses on DC and AC cabling are defined correctly as according to the cable size and length used, as well as accounting for transformer losses if applicable. The Contractor shall also verify these figures with voltage drop calculations

6.1.4.8 Third party verified .PAN of module and .OND file of inverter should be used for analysis.
6.1.4.9 Final Project File of the PVSyst Simulation (.PRJ) file need to be submitted for review
6.1.4.10 Project Parameter Values
6.1.4.10.1 Shadow free time to be considered - Roof Top (All kind of roof) 9.30AM to 4PM throughout the year
6.1.4.10.2 Shadow free time to be considered - Ground Mounted 7:00AM to7:00PM thought the year
6.1.4.10.3 Meteo file Meteonorm 7.2/7.3/8.0
6.1.4.10.4 Lower temperature for absolute voltage 5°C
6.1.4.10.5 Maximum DC/AC ratio allowed for system design 1.3
6.1.4.10.6 Limit overload loss for design (Subarray/MPPT overload) 0.03
6.1.4.10.7 Transposition model Perez-Ineichen
6.1.4.10.8 Albedo factor 0.2
6.1.4.11 Detailed Loss Parameter Values
6.1.4.11.1 Shading scene need to be defined for near shading loss Yes
For GI roof (Uc = 20W/m²K; Uv = 0);
6.1.4.11.2 Thermal losses
For RCC & ground type (Uc = 29W/m²K; Uv = 0);
RCC Roof 1%
6.1.4.11.3 DC losses Metal roof & Ground Mounted (Up to 500 1.5 %
kWp) Less than 1 %
6.1.4.11.4 Series voltage drop 0.7V
6.1.4.11.5 AC loss 2%
6.1.4.11.6 LID As per PV Module OEM with first year degradation value
6.1.4.11.7 Module mismatch loss 1%
6.1.4.11.8 Power loss due to String mismatch 0.10%
6.1.4.11.9 Soiling loss 3%
6.1.4.11.10 IAM loss As per PV Module OEM PAN file
6.1.4.11.11 Unavailability of plant 0
6.1.4.11.12 Clipping Loss <0.7%
6.1.4.11.13 Night auxiliary loss 3W
6.1.4.11.14 Module quality loss 0.50%
6.1.4.12 Variability for 75-99 probability numbers
6.1.4.12.1 Annual variability 2.50%
6.1.4.12.2 Climate changes 0
6.1.4.12.3 Uncertainty in PV module modelling 1%
6.1.4.12.4 Uncertainty in Inverter efficiency 0.50%
6.1.4.12.5 Uncertainty in Soiling mismatch 1%
6.1.4.12.6 Uncertainty in Degradation estimation 1%

6.2 Pollution Assessment

6.2.1 Pollution assessment is important to check its impact on plant generation and long term health of the plant
6.2.2 Pollution report issued by PCB should be referred to check pollutant level
6.2.3 Types of process in premises should be considered for the severity for pollution
6.2.4 Composition used in process like SOx, NOx, NH3, salt etc should be checked
6.2.5 Location of the chimney and composition of flue gases to be checked.
6.2.6 Is there Boiler, Furnace, Heating System installed in the plant? Mark location and share photos
6.2.7 Is steam being used inside the plant? Mark location and share photos
6.2.8 Is Cooling tower available at Factory Premise? Mark location and share photos
6.2.9 Are any chemical fumes observed in plant premises like acid etc? Mark location and share photos
6.2.10 Any colouring work observed in plant? If yes, what are the chemical composition? Mark location and share photos.
6.2.11 Onsite indicators like roof rusting, decolouring etc should be noted.
6.2.12 Is there any smell of ammonia on roof or in premises? If yes, what is distance of platform proposed solar plant where ammonia work is carrying out?
6.2.13 Any manufacturing plant in 5km premises where Sox, Nox work is process? Check from google earth
Water to be tested for following parameters, (At point, where water will be provided for solar)
1. Water hardness
6.2.14 2. Water PPM data
3. Is water has oil composition?
4. Is client aware about quantity of water to be used?
Document No. IN-EN-MD-001
Page 5 of 37
Technical Specification Rev. 3_Q4-24

Date 28-Oct-24

General
6.3 Requirements
Layout Guidelines
6.3.1 General Guidelines
6.3.1.1 PV Plant design is to be developed initially as part of a prefeasibility study which is based on preliminary energy resource and yield estimates, as well as other site-specific requirements and constraints
The plant design should be further improved during the feasibility study, which considers site measurements, site topography, and environmental and social considerations. The following must be included as a Key design features, i.e. type of PV module
6.3.1.2
used, tilting angle, mounting and tracking systems, inverters, and module arrangement. Optimization of plant design involves considerations such as shading, performance degradation, and energy yield.

The key steps for developing a solar PV project are well established, that an EPC can follow. The approach taken in each project depends on site-specific parameters and the developer’s priorities, risk appetite, regulatory requirements, and the types of
6.3.1.3
financing support mechanisms (i.e., above market rates/subsidies or tax credits) available in a given market. However, in all cases, certain activities need to be completed that can broadly be organized in the following five stages,

a Concept development and site identification

b Prefeasibility study
c Feasibility study
d Permitting, financing and contracts
e Engineering, construction and commercial operation
6.3.1.4 The plant design should adhere to local and international standards (such as IEC 62548: 2013, and the International Building Code).
Electrical designs must consider appropriate cabling layouts, lightning protection, and inverter selection. The civil/mechanical design must be designed safely and effectively secure the system to the roof, while considering maintenance requirements for
6.3.1.5
the PV array and the roof.
6.3.1.6 Waterproofing is an important installation consideration. It is important to avoid negative impacts on roof longevity, which can in turn have negative impacts on roofing warranties and insurance
6.3.1.7 The complete layout shall be prepared by using the data which have been verified by the survey team, during the visit at the factory premises
Shadow analysis must be done by using 3D Sketch-Up to understand and identifying the shadow issues causing by the equipment and other utilities mounted on the roof, the guidelines mentioned in the following section to be followed while preparing
6.3.1.8
the layout on 3D Module.
The general and specific guidelines, structure assessment, and electrical assessment shall be followed while design the further layout and drawings, and the approval on the layout will be issued while fulfilling the guidelines mentioned over the
6.3.1.9
document.
6.3.2 Guideline for 3D Layout Preparation
6.3.2.1 Proposed Layout (3D Layout)
6.3.2.2 The 3D Layout should be prepared by considering the following to create the better understand the plant and other constraints (if any)
6.3.2.3 The complete building should be shown along with its height & nearby obstacles (like trees, tower, etc. if any).
The building should be placed on the actual site location coordinate as per google earth to perform the shadow analysis. Also, a google earth image should be used as a reference to demonstrate the same. Building azimuth should be as per
6.3.2.4
google earth. All details (major) of the roof, and Structure details, and purlin details & its location should be shown.
6.3.2.5 All the existing obstacles in the roof which may cast a shadow or may disturb the construction, the existing gutter location, turbo ventilator & skylight should be shown as per the actual site condition
The parapet wall should be shown (if applicable) as per the actual site location, existing RCC Column extension on the RCC roof should be shown (if applicable) as per the actual site condition and measurements, as the extension of the
6.3.2.6
building can create a shadow on the plant which can lead a generation losses in future.
6.3.2.7 The Proposed Layout shall contain the following, but not limited to the listed
a Individual PV Module (actual dimension as per datasheet) along with module to module gap should be shown in the 3D Layout.
b Proposed location of access points for all the individual roofs
c Proposed arrangement of Walkway, Lifeline, Guardrail & access ladder
d Proposed location of Solar Inverter, DCDB (if applicable), and AC Isolator any other electrical/mechanical equipment's
e Proposed location of Solar LT Panel, Client injection point/panel, and other electrical/mechanical equipment's (If any)
f Proposed location of earthing pit w.r.t all package
g Proposed Location of Lightning Arrester
6.3.3 Specific Parameters for the Layout Design
Following are the design guidelines for module layout preparation on both RCC and Purlin based GI Roofs. All layouts must be made according to these guidelines. Any deviation away from these guidelines if implemented in the layout, should be
6.3.3.1
explicitly mentioned in the Pre-Sales Deviation Discussion sheet and SketchUp model itself.
6.3.3.2 RCC Roof
6.3.3.2.1 Shadow free time (Throughout the year) 9.30AM to 4.00PM
6.3.3.2.2 Minimum distance to be maintained between two modules 40 mm
6.3.3.2.3 Minimum offset from parapet 700 mm i.e. from the last part of the installed solar item on the roof
6.3.3.2.4 Minimum height clearance required between building column and Module (For extend., Columns any) 100 mm
6.3.3.2.5 Minimum width clearance required between building column and Module As per shading and shadow free time
6.3.3.2.6 Minimum gap required between two arrays for O & M Pitch or 600 mm whichever is maximum
6.3.3.2.7 Minimum distance to be maintained between two adjacent tables(* Extremely extended part on the table) 100 mm
6.3.3.2.8 Maximum Solar PV Array Width/Length (Module Stack length) for Module Cleaning (O&M) 5300 mm
6.3.3.2.9 Maximum front height of MMS from Roof Level for O&M without using a raised platform 1200 mm
6.3.3.2.10 Minimum Clearance required for Inverter on the roof 1300 mm front. Top, bottom, rear & sides as per inverter Manufacturer guidelines.
6.3.3.2.11 Minimum Clearance required for Solar LT Panel 1000 mm from all the sides, Front side 2000mm & obstacle free
6.3.3.2.12 Minimum Area required for Lightning Arrester Installation 3 Meter * 3 Meter
6.3.3.2.13 Minimum Parapet Height or Guard Rail height along the edges of roof 1000 mm

6.3.3.3 Metal Roof - Trapezoidal/Curved Sheet & Tapping on Purlins

6.3.3.3.1 Shadow free time (Throughout the year) 9.30AM to 4.00PM
6.3.3.3.2 Minimum and Maximum distance to be maintained between two modules As per module OEM guidelines
6.3.3.3.3 Minimum Safety Clearance - Minimum offset from roof edge (last purlin) 1500 mm i.e. from the last part of the installed solar item on the roof
6.3.3.3.4 Minimum Safety Clearance required from Skylight to Module/Walkway 200 mm or Crest to Crest distance, whichever is maximum.
6.3.3.3.5 Minimum Clearance to be maintained for Walkway + Cable Conduit between two arrays 800 mm
6.3.3.3.6 Minimum Clearance to be maintained for Walkway + Cable Conduit + Lifeline between two arrays 1100 mm
6.3.3.3.7 Maximum Distance from walkway to module edge for cleaning considering maximum cleaning rod 5300 mm
6.3.3.3.8 Maximum Purlin to Purlin distance for installing Long Rail mounting structure Rail should be designed for span length
6.3.3.3.9 Preferred Module orientation (Landscape/Portrait) for Long Rail type mounting structure Landscape & module OEM recommendation
6.3.3.3.10 Walkway Width to be considered 350 mm
6.3.3.3.11 Min. Clearance between top of crest & walkway (Applicable on perpendicular & parallel to Purlins) 50 mm
Minimum gap Array Layout or Space consideration for Module Access (From O&M perspective wherever walkway is
6.3.3.3.12 350 mm after every 20 Meter x 05 Meter (Max) Module table.
not present)
6.3.3.3.13 Maximum Cantilever of module to be considered from Purlin 350 mm
6.3.3.3.14 Minimum Guard Rail height along the edges of roof 1000 mm
6.3.3.3.15 Minimum Distance of Guard Rail from the Roof edge Will be installed on last purlin of the roof
6.3.3.3.16 Minimum Area required for Lightning Arrester Installation 3 Purlins Access, [4 Meter * 4 Meter]
6.3.3.4 Metal Roof - Standing Seam
6.3.3.4.1 All the points from Point Number 6.3.3.3.1 to 6.3.3.3.12 must be adhered.
6.3.3.4.2 Maximum Cantilever of module to be considered from short rail / clamp As per Module installation manual
6.3.3.4.3 Safety Clearance Minimum offset from roof edge (last purlin) 1500 mm i.e. from the last part of the installed solar item on the roof
6.3.3.4.4 Minimum Clearance to be maintained between roof and Walkway 50 mm
6.3.3.4.5 Minimum Distance of Guardrail from the centre of end columns/walls (For Standing seam type metal roof) 300 mm

6.3.4 Electrical Assessment

6.3.4.1 Design calculations for the Solar Photovoltaic system should be done by the Contractor and verified with developer. The design calculations shall cover the following as a minimum,
6.3.4.2 Voltage drop (Vd%) and power losses (I2R) along DC lines from Solar Modules to DC Array Junction Box and to the Inverter
6.3.4.3 Voltage drop (Vd%) and power losses (I2R) along AC lines from Inverter to AC Collection System and along sub-main AC lines to grid connection point
6.3.4.4 Calculations to determine the appropriate rating of protective components i.e. fuses, diodes, circuit breakers, earth fault relays, short-circuit capacity etc.
6.3.4.5 As part of the process of pre-installation approval and loss figures should be verified with the corresponding figures used in the PVSyst report. It shall form part of the submission to BECIS during the design stage of the project
6.3.4.6 The Contractor shall appoint/provide "Engineering Services" for all items pertaining to the electrical infrastructure and connection, including but not limited to the listed.
6.3.4.7 Application for connection of the Solar Photovoltaic System to the utility grid
6.3.4.8 Equipment and approvals that enable the system to export power (if allowed)
6.3.4.9 Endorsement of all design calculations, drawings and test reports
Document No. IN-EN-MD-001
Page 6 of 37
Technical Specification Rev. 3_Q4-24

Date 28-Oct-24

General Requirements
6.3.4.10 Design of the appropriate solution to Lightning Protection of the system according to the NFC 17-102/IEC/ relevant local standard
6.3.4.11 Technical advice support and attendance during inspection of the system by the local authority

6.3.5 Structural Assessment

Assessment shall include:
6.3.5.1 Utility load should be calculated and applied as dead load for STAAD analysis
6.3.5.2 Wind, seismic & imposed loads should be applied as per applicable latest Indian standards
6.3.5.3 Impact loading of Safety Lifeline, Handrail during accident should be considered in structure stability analysis
6.3.5.4 During modelling, structure deformation condition should be considered. STAAD modelling should comply for the on ground fixity conditions, connection design and actual site conditions
EPC should submit the following details to BE-CIS as a part of structure assessment report,
1. Building drawing showing building dimension and structure member dimensions
6.3.5.5 2. Load calculation file
3. STAAD File
4. Strengthening drawing with BOM
Approval from the end user should be required for the strengthening work on the roof or other parts of the building .
6.3.5.6
Strengthening should be verified with the certified structural engineer, the report should be submitted with the owner.
6.3.5.7 EPC shall also should be responsible for works like paint application for corroded areas, add missing nut-bolts, replaced damaged sag rods, add grouting cement for baseplate. Etc if required

6.3.6 Engineering Drawings

6.3.6.1 Drawing listed in Master drawing list to be submitted for approval by EPC
6.3.6.2 Below mentioned documents and drawings should be submitted by the EPC and it sub-parties along with list of drawing mentioned below (Master Drawing List MDL)

** All applicable documents and drawings only to be submitted by the contractor for getting review and approval by the BECIS team, Apart from these drawing few specific documents listed on its requirements field which also to be submitted in required form

1 Contour mapping & Plant layout

2 Solar plant road layout with plan & section details
3 Compound wall & fencing layout
4 Solar plant entry gates drawings
5 Geotechnical investigation report(Soil bearing capacity, soil resistivity& Pull out test of sample piles)
6 Civil foundation design details of Module mounting structure, Inverter room, transformers, switchgear cubicles, drains, CDM (Culvert diversion mechanism) as applicable
7 Site grading plan
8 Drain layout with plan & section
9 CDM layout with plan & section
10 Tilt & Pitch analysis report
11 MMS pile foundation layout with plan & section details
12 MMS foundation layout
13 Hardware selection calculations
14 Structural shop assembly drawings, GA & STAAD
15 PV syst simulation & summary
16 Sketch Up & Shadow analysis
17 Selection & design basis reports of equipment's & circuits
18 Voltage drop & power loss calculations for AC & DC side circuit
19 Fault current calculations
20 Earthing conductor sizing & electrode resistance calculations
21 Lightning risk assessment & protection radius calculations
22 Battery & UPS sizing calculations
23 Electrical single line diagram for DC & AC side power & control circuits
24 Electrical single line diagram for Plant auxiliary supply (UPS, Battery, Ventilation, Pumps, Illumination, etc.)
25 Electrical schematic drawing, & BoM for 220V & 24V Battery set, Float cum boost charger & DCDB
26 Battery system layout & connection drawing
27 Power & Auxiliary transformer general arrangement drawings
28 Weather monitoring station & SCADA schematic with Input output list, architecture, device schedule
29 Voltage drop & power loss calculations for AC & DC side circuit
30 Bill of material with Guaranteed technical particulars
31 Array junction box & String monitoring box layout
32 Inverter station switchyard foundation layout with plan & section layout
33 Group control & metering switchyard foundation layout with plan & section layout
34 Inverter station structure layout with plan & section details
35 Group control & metering switchyard structure layout with plan & section details
36 Transformer & outdoor switchgear cubicle foundation drawings
37 Earthing layout (Earth pit cross section, earthing mat ,Earthing conductor layout)
38 Switchyard equipment layout
39 Solar plant illumination calculations for control rooms, switchyards, roads
40 Solar plant illumination layout for control rooms, switchyards, roads
41 Control room architectural drawings
42 Array junction box & String monitoring box layout
43 DC cable trench layout with plan & section details
44 AC cable trench layout with plan & section details
45 Communication(Modbus/OFC) cable layout
46 Power cable quantity & cutting schedule
47 Control cable quantity & cutting schedule
48 Communication cable termination schedule
49 Cable tray GA drawings
50 Underground cable trench drawings
51 Cable accessories detailed drawing
52 Equipment manuals & drawings from OEMs
53 Control panels & power distribution panel drawings
54 Direct stroke lightning protection layout
55 Fire & safety devices layout with component details
56 Storage area GA & layout
57 Water pump pressure calculations & design basis report of RO plant
58 Module cleaning layout
59 Water storage tank
60 OEM/supplier documents with incoming material (Packing lists, test reports, test certificates, inspection notes, leaflets, catalogues)
61 External electrical transmission line drawings, BoM, GTP etc as per agreed conditions
62 External electrical substation bay drawings, BoM, GTP etc as per agreed conditions

7 Scope of Supply
The Contractor shall undertake the supply of the material as detailed out in Bill of Material & scope document
All other ancillary materials necessary to facilitate a complete installation should be deemed to be included in the Contractor’s scope.
Document No. IN-EN-MD-001
Page 7 of 37
Technical Specification Rev. 3_Q4-24

Date 28-Oct-24

8 General
TechnicalRequirements
Specification For Procurement and Installation
8.1 Solar Photovoltaic Modules (High Efficiency)
The PV modules used must qualify to the latest edition of IEC PV module qualification test or equivalent BIS standards Crystalline Silicon Solar Cell Modules IEC 61215 / IS14286. In addition, the modules must conform to IEC 61730 Part-1 -
8.1.1
requirements for construction & Part 2 – requirements for testing, for safety qualification or equivalent IS . Modules will be 100% EL testes .Module test procedures for safety & performance will be fulfilling minimum criteria as per UL1703.
8.1.2 Inverter should be selected based on criteria of Tier 1 global top 10, Module support availability in years , Warranty & installed capacity worldwide
The PV modules are provided to convert the light reaching them into DC power. The amount of power they produce is roughly proportional to the intensity and the angle of the light reaching them. They are therefore required to be positioned to take
8.1.3
maximum advantage of available sunlight within string constraints. The contractor should position the PV modules with respect to the orientation of the building
Solar PV modules should be suitable for seasonal tilt/tracker system .It will be positioned monthly or seasonally to a optimum tilt angle to achieve maximum output (** applicable to the ground mounted solar power plant if it is defined during initial
8.1.4
project requirement and further discussion held on technical and commercial)
8.1.5 The supplier / manufacturer of the PV Module should be in existence for at least 20 years in the Solar PV manufacturing field with proven track record
The Photovoltaic modules must qualify as per IEC 61215 and in addition, the modules must confirm to IEC 61730-1 and IEC 61730-2 requirements for construction & Part-2 requirements for testing & safety qualification. The test certificates from any
8.1.6
of the International Accredited Testing Calibration Laboratories need to be submitted along with Vendor document
The PV Modules shall be
“PID Free” (Potential induced degradation free)
8.1.7
“LID Free” (Light induced degradation free) & LeTID free (Light & elevated temperature induced degradation free)
Supporting documents from the manufacturers shall be submitted along with bidding documents.
8.1.8 Module should have Independent Power Insurance and Accelerated Performance Test should be submitted for selected model
Minimum proven cell efficiency should be greater than or equal to 22% on commercial scale. The minimum efficiency of the module should be greater than or equal to 19%. Supplier shall follow the latest engineering practice; ensure long-term
8.1.9
compatibility requirements and continuity of equipment supply and the safety of the operating staff.

The SPV cells should be manufactured using unique highly efficient diffusion process or any other technology in vogue so as to ensure uniform diffusion profiler to achieve close spread and higher efficiency for each cell. It should be suitable for
8.1.10
continuous outdoor use. The material used for constructing the PV module should be selected in such a way that it gives the maximum efficiency and the latest technology should be adopted for the construction of PV module.

The PV modules should be made of light weight cells, resistant to abrasion, hail impact, rain, water and environmental pollution. The PV modules should be provided with Anti Reflection Coating and the Glass should be AR Coated tempered glass. The
8.1.11
PV module shall use lead wire with weatherproof connector for output terminal.
8.1.12 Stabilized net output of the Solar PV Array for the Solar Power System should not be less than the Nominal design level for the System under Standard Test Condition
PV modules shall withstand wind dust up to 210km/h from back side of the panel. Photo / electrical conversion efficiency of the modules of SPV module should be greater than or equal to 19%. Since the modules would be used in a low/medium voltage
8.1.13
circuit, the insulation test should be carried out on each module and a test certificate to that effect provided. The Vendor shall indicate minimum efficiency.
PV modules used in solar power plants / systems must be warranted for minimum 90% output of P min capacity for the first ten years and 80% output of P min capacity at the end of 25 years. The product workmanship should be guaranteed for 10
8.1.14
years.
8.1.15 The panel should have positive tolerance of Maximum output power and the maximum voltage shall not exceed 1000V. The negative temperature coefficient of power max should be equal to or less than -0.27% per deg C temperature.
PV module should be provided with frame of Anodized Aluminium (either Black or Other) channels for size and simplicity in installation offered as a single module or series parallel combination of modules. The module frame, if any, should be made of
8.1.16
a corrosion-resistant material which should be electrolytically compatible with the structural material used for mounting the modules.
The power output of the PV system under Standard Test Conditions (STC) should be enough to meet the requirement and the required power made of suitable module size depending upon manufacturer prudent practice with required output voltage.
8.1.17 The number of modules to be supplied should be worked out accordingly. Module less than 300Wp capacity should not be supplied or installed. All modules must be of a positive tolerance. Flash test report of each serial number of the module supplied
for the project must be submitted during the execution of the project for client verification.
8.1.18 The high efficiency modules which are proposed for this project should have been installed & operation in India at least for the cumulative capacity 10 MW and single largest installation equivalent to the project capacity
8.1.19 Proposed high efficiency modules should have been installed & operation in Africa /Asia at least for the cumulative capacity 50 MW and single largest installation equivalent to the project capacity
8.1.20 Latest technologies in module manufacturing will be considered provided they fulfil performance & durability criteria. EPC should also additionally furnish third party independent test reports as per Owners criteria/requirements.
8.2 Grid-Connected Inverters
As SPV array produce direct current electricity, it is necessary to convert this direct current into alternating current and adjust the voltage levels to match the grid voltage. Conversion should be achieved using an electronic Inverter and the associated
8.2.1 control and protection devices. All these components of the system are termed the “ Grid Connected inverter”. In addition, the GCI shall also house MPPT (Maximum Power Point Tracker), an interface between Solar PV array & the Inverter, to the
power conditioning unit/inverter should also be DG set interactive. If necessary, Inverter output should be compatible with the grid frequency. Typical technical features of the inverter should be as follows-
The Grid-Connected Inverters shall be 3-phase string/central Inverters of Global Tier 1 brand The GTP of selected model shall be compatible with the local distribution network of the respective region (Please Note: - Central Inverter can be selected
8.2.2
for the ground mounted solar power plant if it is defined or mentioned during discussion)
The Grid-Connected Inverters should be 3-phase string Inverters and compatible with the parameters of the local distribution network of the respective premise (Applicable for roof top installation including small scale ground mounted projects withing
8.2.3
500 KWP)
8.2.4 The following details need to be taken care while selection of inverters
8.2.4.1 Nominal AC Output Voltage range of 230/400 V, 3-Phase ± 6%, 50 Hz
8.2.4.2 No-load losses Less than 1% of rated power
8.2.4.3 Humidity 95 % Non-condensing
8.2.4.4 Inverter efficiency (minimum) >93% (In case of 10 kW or above with in- built galvanic isolation)
8.2.4.5 Equipped with a DC switch which safely isolates DC circuits
8.2.4.6 Ambient temperature of -20 degC to 50 deg C
8.2.4.7 IP65 protection class on sensitive components (overall IP54 on forced-cooling concept separately)
8.2.4.8 Compatible communication protocol with the selected monitoring system
8.2.4.9 Harmonic distortion which shall not exceed limits set by the local authority
8.2.4.10 Accepted and approved by local authority
The enclosure of the Inverter should be double-insulated or rated as a Class II appliance The Grid-Connected Inverters should be equipped with an anti-islanding function to disconnect from the grid in the event of a grid failure within the stipulated time
8.2.5
frame by international and local standards
8.2.6 The output of power factor of inverter is suitable for all voltage ranges or sink of reactive power, inverter should have internal protection arrangement against any sustainable fault in feeder line and against the lightning on feeder
8.2.7 Built-in meter and data logger to monitor plant performance through external computer should be provided.
8.2.8 Anti-islanding (Protection against Islanding of grid): The Inverter shall have anti islanding protection in conformity to IEEE 1547/UL 1741/ IEC 62116 or equivalent BIS standard.
8.2.9 Successful Vendors should be responsible for galvanic isolation of solar roof top power plant (>100kW) with electrical grid or LT panel.
The Inverter generated harmonics, flicker, DC injection limits, Voltage Range, Frequency Range and Anti-Islanding measures at the point of connection to the utility services should follow the latest CEA (Technical Standards for Connectivity
8.2.10
Distribution Generation Resources) Guidelines.
8.2.11 The Inverters should comply with applicable IEC/ equivalent BIS standard for efficiency measurements and environmental tests as per standard codes IEC 61683/IS 61683 and IEC 60068-2 (1,2,14,30)/ Equivalent BIS Std.
8.2.12 The Inverters should be tested from the MNRE approved test centres / NABL / BIS / IEC accredited testing- calibration laboratories. In case of imported power conditioning units, these should be approved by international test houses
Following data should be available for selected inverter model
1. support availability in years
2. MTBF and MTTR figures
8.2.13
3. Service support scope and SLA
4. Model installed worldwide in MW
5. Recommended spares list with cost

8.3 Module Mounting Structure (MMS)

8.3.1 General Guidelines
8.3.1.1 The mounting solution of SPV with MMS should be designed to optimize output taking account of latitude, soiling and ventilation.
8.3.1.2 The Module Mounting structure should be analyse & designed to withstand the all applicable Dead load, live load, wind speed and earthquake load as per all applicable IS code.
8.3.1.3 Mounting structure should not accumulate or hold water during rainy season as well on other seasons.
8.3.1.4 Structure should be designed considering clamping zone recommended by module OEM

Following documents should be submitted by EPC for review and approval purpose,
1. Structure GA with each component thickness, dimensions & BOM
2. Load calculation sheet
3. STAAD/FEA Software files
4. PDF report of STAAD/FEA report
5. Connection design report
8.3.1.6
6. Datasheet of Rivets, fasteners and other BOS.
7. Soil test report (for ground mount & Raised structure, Car port)
8. Wind load Calculation for the location of site ( (for ground mount & Raised structure, Car port, and all kind of RCC Roof installation)
9. Ground contour layout along with marking of drainage water flow direction.
10. Foundation design and calculation
11. Material test report from manufacturer/vendor with details mechanical strength of material.

8.3.1.7 All the executional work need to be initiated at site after getting proper approval on the design submitted. Also, each MMS material need to be inspected by BECIS QC team before getting dispatched from fabrication shop.

8.3.1.8 The compliance raised by BECIS QC team during Pre-Dispatch inspection must be compliance before initiating project work or handing over.
After successful installation of MMS on RCC roof and Metal Roofs, a Water leakage test need to be conducted to ensure there are no damages occurred after execution of Solar System on Roof Top Area. Also, an acceptance certificate
8.3.1.9
shall be taken from end-user. And the same to be submitted along with HOTO documents.
The Marking shall be done on the MMS, for the identification of the table, during the period of O&M, Also the same to be reflected in as-built drawing. The marking is including for the G I Roof installation. Area marking to be done by
8.3.1.10
using proper arrangement as suggested by BECIS.
Additional care shall be taken while installing on metal roof, damage due to the manpower movement while construction activities should be cleared before placing modules as it might lead damages/leakages at later stage. & it can not
8.3.1.11
be corrected at later stage.
Document No. IN-EN-MD-001
Page 8 of 37
Technical Specification Rev. 3_Q4-24

Date 28-Oct-24

General Requirements
8.3.2 Module Mounting Structure (MMS) - Trapezoidal Roof & Standing Seam Roof
For Metal roof, structure and clamps should be Long rail made of AL6063 T6 grade, All fasteners should be made up of SS304 grade. For sites within 20 KM of aerial distance of nearest sea coast/ creek, SS316 fasteners should be
8.3.2.1
used
In trapezoidal roof, the long rails clamps to be fixed on the purlin by using the self-tapping screws this self-tapping screw should pass centre of purlin, & the tapping on the sheet will not be allowed at any situation. In standing seam
8.3.2.2 roof the AL clamps to be used for the MMS with seams of roof, clamps to be selected as per the OEM of sheets, however the approval shall be required from BECIS for selection of clamps. The clamp shall meet all fixing requirement
of the solar module.
The proper fixing arrangement with purlin for trapezoidal roof and with sheet for standing seam to be ensured at time of installation, in prior to the design the fixing arrangement of MMS of standing seam roof that to be verified with
8.3.2.3
seam Infront of team. Nylock nut is required for connection between standing seam sheet and with clamp.
8.3.2.4 Module clearance from the bottom of module frame to the top of sheet crest/seams should be minimum 75 mm or as per module installation manual, whichever is higher
8.3.2.5 Non penetrative solution is NOT allowed
As per BECIS Standard, on AL MMS, there should be 100 mm gap left or extended length of Long rail after fixing the End clamp in both sides, also the same will be applicable for the installation of the Mid-clamp, the MMS to be
8.3.2.6
designed by considering the same, and those dimensions to be indicated in the GA drawing which will be submitted for review and approval purpose.
8.3.2.7 Required / sufficient arrangement should be done to ensure water tight joint at the points of penetration
8.3.2.8 The overlapping arrangement of MMS to be checked with the walkway and lifeline, as, those have to be fixed with the purlins.
The General Purpose Colour is moisture evaporating construction grade sealant to be used for the installation of the MMS on GI Roof, also the same to be used at all locations where the sheets will punchier during the installation.
8.3.2.9
Additional to the sealant, A Extreme Sealing Tape 4412N (3M Make) highly conformable single-side acrylic tape with a high performance, 2.0 mm thick, to be used to cover the damages on the sheet.
8.3.3 Module Mounting Structure (MMS) - RCC Roof
8.3.3.1 For RCC roof , material should be hot dip galvanized with minimum 80 micron galvanisation thickness. all members of the MMS to be selected as per the requirement and as per the requirement of design calculation.
Following method of roof structure fixing with roof slab are accepted,
1. Fixing of concrete pedestal with Nitobond on mother slab. Nitobond application on waterproofing layer is not allowed.
2. Dead load design to counter wind forces
8.3.3.2
3. Chemical anchoring. (only mother slab imbedded length strength will be accepted)

However, the above mentioned documents to be submitted for the review and approval purpose of BECIS.
The civil foundation to be casted properly as per the design. Approved make of cement, steel to be used. RMC can be considered but the required document has to be submitted for the review and approval purpose of BECIS Team.
8.3.3.3
Minimum M20 reinforced concrete is allowed.

Before casting of civil foundation, the following test to be performed, The mixing ratio of the concrete should be done/followed as per the approval given by the BECIS.

1. River sand, Fine aggregate & coarse aggregate quarry test report is required. Rebar, cement and any admixture manufacturer/vendor lab test
report.
2. Concrete mix design report as per the material test report and grade of material.
8.3.3.4
3. Cube Test at Lab as per mix design & grade of material.
4. Concrete density test on lab as per mix design & grade of material.
5. Slum Test at site

The result of all test should meet the requirements as per the design, else the rework to be carried out until get match the requirement. Meeting required surface finish, all quality requirements & strength will be the scope of EPC.

8.3.3.5 The shape of the foundation is important, repair work on the concreate to be done if required, Water proof paint to be applied on the civil foundation, colour code to be used as suggested by M/s BECIS.
The proper water sealing arrangement should be bused around the MMS foundations of RCC roof installation, and all around the area were the work done by the installer, the same to be done by using construction chemical (i.e. dr.fixit
8.3.3.6
or other as per the approved specification). The make and detailed specifications will be shared during the detailed engineering.
8.3.4 Module Mounting Structure (MMS) - Raised Structure (On Existing RCC Roof and Installation on Ground)
8.3.4.1 Raised structure installation shall be planned to install on existing RCC roof as well on the ground.
While planning to install on the existing roof, the building stability to be reviewed and the same have to be submitted with BECIS design team for the review and approval purpose.
8.3.4.2
Also, the column and other load bearing members of the MMS to be placed over the existing column or beams of RCC Roof to ensure the load distribution.
8.3.4.3 While planning to install on the ground, the soil test report has to be submitted for the review and approval purpose of BECIS design team.

For raised structure which will be installed on ground or on existing RCC roof should be the Hot Dip Galvanized with minimum 80 micron galvanisation thickness generally (i.e. including, Base plate, column, rafter, sag rod, purlin &
8.3.4.4
purlin fixing/joining arrangement and etc.,). And all members of the MMS to be selected as per the requirement design calculation. Also the calculation shall be submitted to BECIS for review and approval of BECIS.

The project location within 20 KM from sea or creek should have higher HDG thickness i.e., 100 Microns. Also, the same applicable for project which will be located near to the atmosphere where the corrosion easily occur eon MMS
8.3.4.5
& Utilities due to the process in the end-user plant or surrounding industries in the area.

8.3.4.6 The civil foundation calculation shall be submitted along with MMS GA, to validate the same, the civil foundation has to be designed in such a way it should sustain/carry all kind of loads without an any issue.
The civil foundation to be casted properly as per the design. Approved make of cement, steel to be used. RMC can be considered but the required document has to be submitted for the review and approval purpose of BECIS Team
8.3.4.7
before initiating the work with RMC.

Before casting of civil foundation, the following test to be performed, The mixing ratio of the concrete should be done/followed as per the approval given by the BECIS.

1. River sand, Fine aggregate & coarse aggregate quarry test report is required. Rebar, cement and any admixture manufacturer/vendor lab test
report.
2. Concrete mix design report as per the material test report and grade of material.
8.3.4.8
3. Cube Test at Lab as per mix design & grade of material.
4. Concrete density test on lab as per mix design & grade of material.
5. Slum Test at site

The result of all test should meet the requirements as per the design, else the rework to be carried out until get match the requirement. Meeting required surface finish, all quality requirements & strength will be the scope of EPC.

Layout planning shall be done in such a way where the minimum space will be used for the maximum capacity, There should be access for each modules or the array (as per EHS and O&M Requirement) to carry out the maintenance
8.3.4.9
activity. All the EHS guideline to be

While installing the modules on structure, the OEM guideline to be followed, the purlins to be placed in such a way as required for the modules. From electrical side additional precautions to be considered for DC cable laying/routing
8.3.4.10
on MMS, Structure earthing and Module earthing. The guidelines of Modules OEM and BECIS Guideline to be followed. Additional required for these utilities installation with MMS to be considered during initial stage.

8.3.4.11 The shape of the foundation is important, repair work on the concreate to be done if required, Water proof paint to be applied on the civil foundation, colour code to be used as suggested by M/s BECIS.
The proper water sealing arrangement should be bused around the MMS foundations of RCC roof installation, and all around the area were the work done by the installer, the same to be done by using construction chemical (i.e. dr.fixit
8.3.4.12
or other as per the approved specification). The make and detailed specifications will be shared during the detailed engineering.
8.3.5 Module Mounting Structure (MMS) - Car Parking
8.3.5.1 Installation of Solar Plant can be planned over Open Car parking area on ground, as well it can be planned to install on RCC Roof car parking (in case of Multi level parking type).
While planning to install on the existing roof, the building stability to be reviewed and the same shall be submitted with BECIS design team for the review and approval purpose.
8.3.5.2
Also, the column and other load bearing members of the MMS to be placed over the existing column or beams of RCC Roof to ensure the load distribution.
8.3.5.3 While planning to install on the ground, the soil test report has to be submitted for the review and approval purpose of BECIS design team.
For structure which will be installed on ground or on existing RCC roof should be the Hot Dip Galvanized with 80 micron galvanisation thickness generally (i.e. including, Base plate, column, rafter, sag rod, purlin & purlin
8.3.5.4
fixing/joining arrangement and etc.,). And all members of the MMS to be selected as per the requirement design calculation. Also the calculation shall be submitted to BECIS for review and approval of BECIS.
8.3.5.5 The civil foundation calculation shall be submitted along with MMS GA, to validate the same, the civil foundation has to be designed in such a way it should sustain/carry all kind of loads without an any issue.
The civil foundation to be casted properly as per the design. Approved make of cement, steel to be used. RMC can be considered but the required document has to be submitted for the review and approval purpose of BECIS Team
8.3.5.6
before initiating the work with RMC.

Before casting of civil foundation, the following test to be performed, The mixing ratio of the concrete should be done/followed as per the approval given by the BECIS.

1. River sand, Fine aggregate & coarse aggregate quarry test report is required. Rebar, cement and any admixture manufacturer/vendor lab test
report.
2. Concrete mix design report as per the material test report and grade of material.
8.3.5.7
3. Cube Test at Lab as per mix design & grade of material.
4. Concrete density test on lab as per mix design & grade of material.
5. Slum Test at site

The result of all test should meet the requirements as per the design, else the rework to be carried out until get match the requirement. Meeting required surface finish, all quality requirements & strength will be the scope of EPC.

Layout planning shall be done in such a way where the minimum space will be used for the maximum capacity, Also, the requirement of end user to be considered, there should be sufficient space for their application like movement of
8.3.5.8
vehicles and other utilities.
A Moving platform shall be provided to carry out the maintenance activities and other purpose during tenure years, the moving platform should have guardrail, wheel with lockable breaks, also the EHS guidelines to be followed while
8.3.5.9
designing the moveable platform.
Additional precaution to be taken around the column to prevent damaging the civil foundation during vehicles movement while it is in under operation. A metal gauge guard to be provided around the civil foundation to ensure the same.
8.3.5.10
The painting of these metal gauge guard to be done as per the EHS requirement, additionally the should have a reflective element which will help to identify the same at night time.
8.3.5.11 Drive way to be mentioned in the layout which will be submitted for the review and approval purpose from end user.

While installing the modules on structure, the OEM guideline to be followed, the purlins to be placed in such a way as required for the modules. From electrical side additional precautions to be considered for DC cable laying/routing
8.3.5.12
on MMS, Structure earthing and Module earthing. The guidelines of Modules OEM and BECIS Guideline to be followed. Additional required for these utilities installation with MMS to be considered during initial stage.
Document No. IN-EN-MD-001
Page 9 of 37
Technical Specification Rev. 3_Q4-24

Date 28-Oct-24

General Requirements
8.3.5.13 The shape of the foundation is important, repair work on the concreate to be done if required, Water proof paint to be applied on the civil foundation, colour code to be used as suggested by M/s BECIS.
8.3.5.14 The "Chamfering Work" needs to be done on all 4 sides of a civil foundation to avoid water seepage through corners.
The permanent water leakproof arrangement needs to be done on the RCC Floor if it is asked by BECIS or "End-user". Also, in case of any damages done on the water leak prevention arrangement by the installer at time of execution it
8.3.5.15
must be repaired by installer with no cost to BECIS and End-User.
8.3.6 Module Mounting Structure (MMS) - Ground Mounted (Small Scale installation Up to 1000 kWP)
8.3.6.1 For Ground mount MMS material should be hot dip galvanized with 80 micron galvanisation thickness. all members of the MMS to be selected as per the requirement and as per the requirement of design calculation.
The project location within 20 KM from sea or creek should have higher HDG thickness i.e., 100 Microns. Also, the same applicable for project which will be located near to the atmosphere where the corrosion easily occur eon MMS
8.3.6.2
& Utilities due to the process in the end-user plant or surrounding industries in the area.

8.3.6.3 The method of fixing and type of the civil foundation to be done as per the design calculation and the layout requirement, However, the above mentioned documents to be submitted for the review and approval purpose of BECIS.

8.3.6.4 The civil foundation to be casted properly as per the design. Approved make of cement, steel to be used. RMC can be considered but the required document has to be submitted for the review and approval purpose of BECIS Team.

Before casting of civil foundation, the following test to be performed, The mixing ratio of the concrete should be done/followed as per the approval given by the BECIS.

1. River sand, Fine aggregate & coarse aggregate quarry test report is required. Rebar, cement and any admixture manufacturer/vendor lab test
report.
2. Concrete mix design report as per the material test report and grade of material.
8.3.6.5
3. Cube Test at Lab as per mix design & grade of material.
4. Concrete density test on lab as per mix design & grade of material.
5. Slum Test at site

The result of all test should meet the requirements as per the design, else the rework to be carried out until get match the requirement. Meeting required surface finish, all quality requirements & strength will be the scope of EPC.

8.3.6.6 The shape of the foundation is important, repair work on the concreate to be done if required, Water proof paint to be applied on the civil foundation, colour code to be used as suggested by M/s BECIS.
The proper water sealing arrangement should be bused around the MMS foundations of RCC roof installation, and all around the area were the work done by the installer, the same to be done by using construction chemical (i.e. dr.fixit
8.3.6.7
or other as per the approved specification). The make and detailed specifications will be shared during the detailed engineering.
8.4 Fasteners
8.4.1 All projects - SS304 except for sites within 20 KM of aerial distance from nearest coast, creek. For such a sites SS316 material to be used.
8.4.2 For each joint, 2 Number of plain washer, 1 spring washer and Nylock nut should be used
8.4.3 The washer must be using both the head and nut side of the bolt.
8.4.4 Spring washer to be used on the nut side.
8.4.5 Minimum three thread must be out of the nut (safety thread).

8.5 Walkway
8.5.1 The walkway layout should be designed in such a way, to allow safe access with cleaning tools for a maximum range of 5 modules in landscape (i.e. 5 meter) for both sides of the walkway
8.5.2 The walkways must be designed for the dead loads of the structure plus a Super imposed live load of 80 kg per running meter uniformly distributed.
8.5.3 Minimum Width = 350 mm, width to be increased to 500 mm when crossing the skylight or within 250 mm from skylight edge.

8.5.4 Walkways must be installed for access including the modules , Inverters, and Pyranometer. When the roof tilt is Equal or Above 11 degree a proper walkway must be installed for accessing the LA and other roof mounted accessories, etc.,

All the fabricate-able material which will be used on the walkway, walkway support, crossing arrangement, holding clamp (M Type) and other accessories as per design should be a Hot Dip Galvanized with 80 Micron Thickness (higher thickness will
8.5.5
be required where the site located nearby or within 20 KM there is sea or creeks). Steel grade shall be MS E250 as per IS 2062.
Aluminium walkway could be used on the roof where the roof tilt is below or equal to 6 degree. It is applicable only on a horizontal walkway (i.e., Parallel to the purlins). Grating Type HDG walkway should be considered for vertical walkway (i.e.,
8.5.6
Perpendicular to the purlins). Please Note: - There is no deviation on material of walkway support when the aluminium walkway shall be considered.
8.5.7 All the walkway shall be installed on walkway support. The walkway and walkway support shall be designed in such a way to transfer the entire load to the purlin directly. Direct fixing arrangement with GI Sheet shall be avoided
Additionally, while selecting walkway support the following to be taken in account, i.e., there should be sufficient gap left below the walkway (b/w top of the crest and bottom of the walkway) to cross the DC Conduit, MCS Pipelines, earth strip. It will
8.5.8
help to avoid crossing above the walkway.

8.5.9 The fasteners which will be used on connections, joints and other purpose shall be a SS 304 / SS 316 Grade. Apart from the screw which will be used to fix with roof's purlin. Refer the fasteners section "8.4 - Fasteners" for further detailing

Water leakproof arrangement should be used along with self-tapping screw which will be used to fix walkway support with purlins. The required arrangement as per BECIS are a "2 mm Thk EPDM Sheet & applying silicon sealant on taping screw as
8.5.10
well all sides where water easily get in".
Walkway support could be used as a support medium of the utilities like, DC Conduits, cable tray, earth strip and MCS system, but an additional support should be provided in between walkway support as the span for utilities installation must be equal
8.5.11
or less than 1000 mm.
In case the crossing of utilities can't be done below the walkway it can be routed above the walkway by providing an appreciable crossing arrangement to prevent from "Tripping Hazards",
8.5.12 A sample of required arrangements GA along with material type, arrangement which to be done will be provided by BECIS design team to guide contractors design team.
Please note:- "Tripping Hazards" should be considered while designing of such an arrangement & EHS approval will be required to proceed further.

8.5.13 Refer the below matrix for required type of walkways with respect to the roof tilt. The GA and other drawings should be prepared by considering the same and necessary approval shall be taken from BECIS design team.

Above 6 degree up to less than 9 Equal or greater than 9 degree up to less

Below or equal to 6 degree Equal or Above 11 degree
degree than 11 degree

For Horizontal walkway flush mounted grating type HDG walkway or Zero-degree grating type HDG walkway with
Zero-degree grating type HDG walkway with HDG supports and
Aluminium walkway with HDG supports and corrosion proof h/w Flush mounted grating type HDG HDG supports and corrosion proof h/w. All
corrosion proof h/w. All HDG Walkways to be anchored on purlin and
walkway with HDG supports and HDG Walkways to be anchored on purlin and
for standing seam roof, walkways shall be supported from standing
For Vertical walkway only grating type HDG walkway with HDG corrosion proof h/w for standing seam roof, walkways shall be
seam.
supports and corrosion proof h/w supported from standing seam.
A similar arrangement with respect to the roof tilt shall be provided for the walkway when it crossing over the skylight along with the proper supporting arrangement as per design calculation. It should be reflected on the GA and other drawing which
8.5.14
will be submitted to BECIS design team for approval.
Following documents should be submitted by EPC for review,
1. Walkway GA with each component thickness, dimensions, material grade & BOM
2. Load calculation sheet
8.5.15 3. STAAD/FEA Software files
4. PDF report of STAAD/FEA report
5. Datasheet of self tapping screw/rivets/fasteners
6. Test certificate of Steel.

8.6 Lifeline
8.6.1 All lifeline and its accessories must comply EN 795:2012 & CEN/TS 16415:2013. Refer the below matrix for getting idea where the lifeline to be provided with respect to the roof tilt.
8.6.2 Lifeline should be designed for Multi-user devices and must be tested to simulate a fall of minimum of four users as per standard.
8.6.3 Lifeline accessories like intermediate anchor, end anchor, corner plates, and other accessories except base plate must be a SS 304 / SS 316 grade material. Baseplate could be Hot Dip galvanized with 80 Micron Thickness.
8.6.4 Anchoring arrangement of Lifeline baseplate shall be done as per BECIS requirement. The layout shall be designed in such a way like the one of anchoring on lifelines base will be fixed on purlin. Other anchoring can be fixed with Sheet.
8.6.5 The selection of anchor fasteners shall be done by considering the load of entries lifeline as per EN795. Also, an approval will be required on fasteners from BECIS design team.
8.6.6 Joining on the straight line of lifeline will not be allowed hence the designing should be done properly by considering the site requirement / condition.
8.6.7 There should not be any obstacles on lifeline while using the same. All crossing or intermediate equipment to be installed in such a way to avoid which become obstacles in future days.
8.6.8 All the utilities on the roof like DC Cable conduit, earth strip, MCS pipeline and earth strip should be routed below the lifeline in such a way to give clear accessing arrangement for the user.
8.6.9 Additionally, the Maximum allowed distance between the two anchors on the lifeline shall be equal or less than 12 Meters. It to be taken care in the account at time of designing.
8.6.10 Lifeline GA, layout and other fabrication drawing shall be submitted to BECIS design team for validation and review purpose. The comments which are given by EHS & Design team to be incorporated in the design as well as execution.
8.6.11 All the roof mounted accessories should have lifeline provisions for easy access. Refer the below matrix for detailing of lifeline requirement on plant area with respect to the roof tilt. It shall be considered while designing.
Above 6 degree up to less than 9 Equal or greater than 9 degree up to less
8.6.12 Below or equal to 6 degree Equal or Above 11 degree
degree than 11 degree

Lifeline (Complying to EN 795 Lifeline (Complying to EN 795 standard) to be

Lifeline (Complying to EN 795 standard) to be provided along the last Lifeline (Complying to EN 795 standard) along all walkway which is
standard) to be provided along the provided along the closest walkways from the
walkways from the roof edge more than 8 meters away from the edge
closest walkways from the roof ridge roof ridge

Lifeline to be provided along with the LA access if it is within 5 meters

from the roof edge Lifeline to be provided along with the Lifeline to be provided along with the LA
Lifeline to be provided along with the LA access if it is within 5 meters
LA access if it is within 5 meters from access if it is within 5 meters from the roof
No need to provide lifeline if there is Guard rail of height 1 Mtr. & from the roof edge
the roof edge edge
above.

Following documents should be submitted by EPC for review and approval from BECIS design.
1. Lifeline GA with each components detailing, material grade & BOM
8.6.13
2. Datasheet of self tapping screw/rivets/fasteners
3. Test certificate of Steel.
Document No. IN-EN-MD-001
Page 10 of 37
Technical Specification Rev. 3_Q4-24

Date 28-Oct-24

General
8.7 Requirements
Safety Net
8.7.1 The skylight which comes under the plant operational area should be covered with safety net, there are two separate arrangement for installation w.r.t to the type of safety net being used across industries
8.7.2 Deviation from proposed/required arrangement will not be allowed for this case.
Safety net design should meet the OSHA standard as per following clause,

8.7.3 29 CFR §1910.23 GUARDING FLOOR AND WALL OPENINGS AND HOLES.
(a)(4) Every skylight floor opening and hole should be guarded by a standard skylight screen or a fixed standard railing on all exposed sides.
(e)(8) Skylight screens should be of such construction and mounting that they are capable of withstanding a load of 200 pounds applied perpendicular at any one area of the screen. They shall
8.7.4 Type 1 - Glass Type Skylight
a While designing the safety net for "Glass Type" Skylight additional care shall be taken, It shall be designed in such a way, when it is engaging all the load to be transferred to purlin by via a metal frame.
The Metal Frame should be fabricated in "Mild Steel, with 80 Micron Thickness of Hot Dip Galvanized (HDG) treatment on its surface to prevent from crossing". The frame shall be designed in such a way to fix perfectly on the purlins at its
b
location. It should be fixed with purlins by using Self-Tapping Screw.
c Skylight screen shall be in MS with HDG minimum 60 micron, 3.2 mm diameter welded wire mesh of 50 mm x 50 mm grid. It should be connected with metal frame by using SS 304 clips.
d The combined arrangement of "Skylight screen and Frame", designed to hold static load of 91 kg, and when fall of a person on skylight It should not have deflection which could break skylight if load is applied.
8.7.5 Type 2 - Non-Glass Skylight

a Non-glass skylight are being used widely in across all project, the provision which been asked to provide must be implemented without any deviations
b The Skylight screen shall be a HDG or SS safety net, it must hold the static load of 91 kg and fall of a person on skylight. No deflection criteria shall not be accepted.
c The specification of screen shall be 3.2 mm diameter welded wire mesh of 50 mm x 50 mm grid with non respect to the material. 60 Micron thickness should be maintained when the material is made from MS-HDG
8.7.6 Get the GA from BECIS at time of project initiation to be clear on the final required design with respect to the project, as well the type of safety net which need to be used.
8.7.7 Load bearing capacity calculation of anchors & anchoring points need to be submitted for review along with its GA for review and approval process of BECIS Design and EHS team.
8.7.8 All kind of welding which will be done on skylight screen and metal frame shall be done properly.
8.7.9 The fabrication of metal frame shall be done with the member which does not have the joints. The joints can be done by getting an approval from BECIS on the method, In case, if joints to be done to match the length of job.
8.7.10 All the welding work must be completed before galvanization treatment. And get inspected properly.

8.8 Turbo vent protection

8.8.1 For FRP turbo vent sheets - an appropriate hazard warning/identification arrangements to be provided around the sheet
8.8.2 For Polycarbonate turbo vent sheets - sheet gaps of >250 mm around rotating turbo vent to be covered with pre-coated/galvanized sheet with self-tapping screws
8.9 Handrail
8.9.1 Handrail material shall be Hot Dip Galvanized with 80 Micron Thickness (higher thickness will be required where the site located nearby or within 20 KM there is sea or creeks). Steel grade shall be MS E250 as per IS 2062
8.9.2 Handrail should contain the structural element like vertical column, horizontal support, back support. The structural element which will be fixed with the Roof should have a baseplate.
8.9.3 Pre-fabricated handrail & its accessories shall be supplied to the site. All the project requirement should be taken care in the account at time of design to avoid in the manner of fabrication work at site.
8.9.4 While installing the major load handling structural member to be fixed on the roof's purlin only by using a self-tapping screw and rivets as per design calculation and an approval by BECIS design team. Fixing with GI sheet will not be allowed.
8.9.5 The anchoring of posts and framing of members for railings of all types shall be of such construction that the completed structure shall be capable of withstanding a load of at least 90 kgs applied in any direction at any point on the top rail
8.9.6 All the anchoring on the railing system which will be used to fix with roof shall be provided with water sealing arrangement i.e., 2 mm Thk EPDM washer and silicon sealant from all sides to prevent water leakage through connection area.
8.9.7 The horizontal rail on railing system should have Minimum of 3 rails (top rail, intermediate rail & bottom rail) when it will be installed on the GI roof. When it will be installed on RCC Roof it could have 2 rails (top rail & bottom rail).
8.9.8 There is limitation on the distance between two vertical columns on the railing arrangement, it should be equal or less than eight (8) feet apart. It should be considered on design from initial stage.
8.9.9 Refer the below matrix to understand the requirement of handrail height with respect to the tilt & roof type.
Above 6 degree up to Equal or greater than 9 degree up
Below or equal to 6 degree Equal or Above 11 degree RCC Roofs with zero degree slope
less than 9 degree to less than 11 degree
Min. 100 cm height
Min. 100 cm height HDG handrail to Min. 100 cm height HDG handrail to be Min. 90 cm height parapet / HDG handrail to be provided. It must be
No handrail required HDG handrail to be
be provided. provided. fixed on roof edge
provided.
8.9.10 The columns of handrail should have a civil foundation when the handrail will be installed on the RCC roof. Foundation design to be done as per project and BECIS requirement.
8.9.11 All the fasteners should be of SS304/SS316 material. Each connection points should have two plain washer + one spring washer with proper size in manner to pack the slot/holes at the connection.
Following documents should be submitted by EPC for review,
1. Handrail GA with each component thickness, dimensions & BOM
2. Load calculation sheet
8.9.12
3. STAAD/FEA Software files
4. PDF report of STAAD/FEA report
5. Datasheet of self tapping screw/rivets/fasteners

8.10 Roof Access

8.10.1 General Design Parameters
8.10.1.1 The following terms were applicable in terms of developing the access arrangement for the plant area and its related utilities which will be the parts of solar power plant as owned by the BECIS
8.10.1.2 These arrangements always to be provided in independent, should not be controlled by the end user like it shall have a proper and free access for the BECIS teams as well their contractor who will be working on that plant during life cycle.
8.10.1.3 In case where the roof has no access point, mobile permanent or fixed permanent clear access will be required in order to access roof during site execution and maintenance period
8.10.1.4 Roof landing platform should be designed in a way to always maintained 3-point of contact.
8.10.1.5 There should be 2 exits needed if any or a combination of following apply i. Roof heights over 15 metres ii. Safest (not shortest) travel distance to the nearest exit from any location exceeds 200 meters.
8.10.1.6 This entry / exit point can be internal or external but must be fixed (permanent) and accessible at all times from top to bottom.
8.10.1.7 In case the Off taker access ladder is used, the same will be verified for suitability as per our guidelines set. If it should not meet the requirements, a separate ladder to be provided as per the above requirements
8.10.1.8 Ladder should be extended 1 m over roof edge for safe access.
8.10.1.9 Approved material for ladder are Mild steel & aluminium subject to design approval.
8.10.1.10 At top the landing platform with handrail (1000 mm height) should be required, fixing of ladder must be done with purlins of structure.
8.10.1.11 Ladders landing platform must overlap with walkway & ladder guard rail to be extended 1 mtr from the roof.
8.10.1.12 Properly anchored on the ground and roof with civil foundations (RCC). Ladder should be fixed with Nut & bolts with existing girt member of the building. Mechanical anchor to be used for fixing with wall.
8.10.1.13 Ladder should have one coat red oxide + 2 coats Zinc rich paint. (Zinkote 20GP Promtech paint.). For coastal site Zinc rich paint with PTFE (TEF- Zink 21) should be used. Paint should be applied as per OEM recommendation.
Following documents should be submitted by EPC for review,
1. Ladder GA with each component thickness, dimensions & BOM
2. Load calculation sheet
8.10.1.14
3. STAAD/FEA Software files
4. PDF report of STAAD/FEA report
5. Datasheet of self tapping screw/rivets/fasteners

8.10.2 Metal Staircase

8.10.2.1 Metal staircase to be designed in such a way that it can withstand a Uniformly Distributed Load (UDL) of 4 kN/sq.mtr.
8.10.2.2 Staircase shall not be inclined at an angle greater than 45° from the horizontal.
8.10.2.3 Stairs shall have straight flight not less than 1250 mm wide with 250 mm treads and risers not more than 190 mm. The number of risers should be limited to 15 per flight.
8.10.2.4 The treads should be constructed and maintained in a manner to prevent slipping.
8.10.2.5 Handrails shall be provided at a height of 1 meter to be measured from the base of the middle of the treads to the top of the handrails
8.10.2.6 Must have locking system to prevent unauthorized access
8.10.3 Cage Ladder
8.10.3.1 Ladder with each rung must be designed to withstand a live load of at-least 110 kg.

8.10.3.2 The distance between rungs shall not exceed 12 inches and shall be uniform throughout the length of the ladder. Rungs shall be coated with skid-resistant material, or otherwise treated to minimize the possibility of slipping

8.10.3.3 Cages shall not extend less than 27 nor more than 28 inches from the centreline of the rungs of the ladder
8.10.3.4 Cages shall extend down the ladder to a point not less than 7 feet nor more than 8 feet above the base of the ladder
8.10.3.5 Cage horizontal bars shall be located at a maximum spacing of 120 cm and vertical bars shall be located at a maximum spacing of 40 degrees around the circumference of the cage
A landing platform shall be provided in the middle where the height of ladder is more than 10 Meter. It shall be equipped with standard railing of height 1 meter, so arranged as to give safe access to the ladder. Platforms shall be not
8.10.3.6
less than 24 inches in width and 30 inches in length & the landing platform should have load bearing capacity for 160 kg.
8.10.3.7 Must have lock to prevent unauthorized access and cage should be high enough to extend minimum of 1m over roof edge for safe access.
8.10.3.8 Ladder which doesn’t have any cage and slope between 75 degree to 90 degree and height over 4 mtr. must have OSHA compliant vertical lifeline with stainless steel cable in centre of the ladder
8.10.4 Roof to Roof Crossing
8.10.4.1 Roof to roof crossing platform as required if applicable, a landing platform arrangement with handrail should be provided where it is applicable or as per EHS Guidelines.
8.10.4.2 For the roofs / platforms with the height difference greater than 1.5 meter, step ladder with handrails to be provided
Document No. IN-EN-MD-001
Page 11 of 37
Technical Specification Rev. 3_Q4-24

Date 28-Oct-24

General
8.12 Requirements
Cable Handling Arrangement (* Applicable for AC Cable, DC Cable & Communication Cable)
8.12.1 General Design Specification & Requirements
8.12.2 The below listed terms are minimum requirement which to be taken care while designing, purchasing and installation of cable handling arrangement, also other aesthetic & technical requirement which is not listed here to be considered.
8.12.3 All the cable installation in the plant area shall be done with handling arrangement i.e.., Conduit, and Tray which is applicable for AC Cable, DC Cable and Communication cable as well
8.12.4 All the mentioned specific terms must be fulfilled without deviation in any stages like designing, procurement, & execution.
8.12.5 Refer the below matrix for the selection of suitable handling arrangement with respect to the type of cable and roof types

8.12.6 Sr. No Type of Cable Installation Location Required Handling Arrangement (i.e. installation)
RCC Roof - Horizontal Installation
1. AC Cable
Raised Structure
2. Other Cable Perforated Type Cable Tray with cover, cover clamps and
Metal Roof - Trapezoidal Roof
1 holding supports
(** Applicable for Metal Roof - Standing Seam Roof
RPR &
Brick Wall - Vertical Installation
Power Supply)
Under Ground As per mentioned methodology in section "8.13.6.4"
RCC Roof - Horizontal Installation
Raised Structure
Metal Roof - Trapezoidal Roof Refer the section "8.13.5.2" for the arrangement which to be
2 DC Cable
Metal Roof - Standing Seam Roof done to handle the DC Cabling in the plant area.
Brick Wall - Vertical Installation
Under Ground
RCC Roof - Horizontal Installation
Raised Structure
uPVC Pipe, SCH 40, UV Stabilized, With holding Supports
Metal Roof - Trapezoidal Roof
3 Communication Cable & SS Clamps
Metal Roof - Standing Seam Roof
Brick Wall - Vertical Installation
Under Ground As per mentioned methodology in section "8.13.7.8"
8.12.7 Following terms are required specification/requirement which to be fulfilled while designing, purchasing and execution of cable handling materials

8.12.8 Cable Tray

Perforated type cable tray with cover shall be used in the plant area for handling the DC Cables. Ladder type cable tray with cover shall be used in the plant area for handling the AC Cables. Indoor AC cable tray can be without cover.
8.12.8.1 The material for tray and cover shall be MS, Hot Dip Galvanized with 80 Micron Thickness. Higher thickness i.e., 100 Micron of coating shall be required for the site which is near to the creek and sea within 20 KM radius. Ladder
type tray rungs will be fabricated from 3mm thickness material& width will be minimum 20mm .Maximum width 900mm for ladder type trays.
8.12.8.2 Thickness of the cable tray shall be 1.6 mm. The punches on the perforated tray shall be done on the surface area only, the collar shall be a clear metal i.e., without punches.
8.12.8.3 There should not be any sharp edges on the surface of the cable tray where the cable will be
8.12.8.4 The cover of cable tray shall be MS, Hot Dip Galvanized with 80 Micron Thickness. Higher thickness i.e., 100 Micron of coating shall be required for the site which is near to the creek and sea within 20 KM radius.
8.12.8.5 The fixing method of cover with the cable tray shall be a done in removable type only, like it should be done with cover clamps along with suitable SS fasteners only.
8.12.8.6 Proper bending shall be done by using similar size of tray to make the turn as per routing. Similar size of covers shall be used for bends as well
The connection between the cable tray to cable tray shall be done with SS fasteners and coupler plate in suitable sizes. The fasteners which will be used on the tray to tray connection shall be the Hex head bolt type, or it does not have
8.12.8.7
the sharp edges which can cause the damages to the insulation layer of the cables.

When the selection of sizes, the filling area and the following terms shall be taken on the consideration,
1. DC Cable - 40% fill factor must be followed to avoid difficulty in pulling as it will lead damages on insulation layer of cable. The calculation formula shall be "Area of Cable / Area of Tray"
2. AC Cable -
a). Follow the instructions of OEM regarding grouping as it is related with the voltage drop calculation
b). Width of cable tray as suitable for cable & its grouping factor
8.12.8.8
c). The collar of the tray shall be selected as suitable for the OD of AC Cable as the covers should not be touched the outer sheath of cable
d). Bending radius of cable shall be considered while selecting the width

** When the width of cable tray in going beyond 800 mm, the cover and tray shall have a stiffener support in middle along the length or width to avoid getting bend. It can be fixed on bottom side without leading to damage to the cable
and other accessories.

8.12.9 uPVC Pipe, SCH 40, UV Stabilized

8.12.9.1 uPVC Pipe, SCH40, UV Stabilized conduit with accessories are the approved medium to carry the communication cable on all kind of installation on RCC Roof only
8.12.9.2 Refer the below matrix for the maximum allowed runs of DC cable with 6 mm diameter w.r.t conduit size.

8.12.9.3 Sr. No uPVC Conduit Size Allowed Runs Remarks

1 1/2 Inch UPVC Pipe 2 Run
2 3/4 Inch UPVC Pipe 4 Run Please Note:- These are the maximum
allowed no of runs which can be laid
3 1 Inch UPVC Pipe 6 Run through the conduit. Deviation beyond
4 1 1/4 Inch UPVC Pipe 10 Run the allowed limit will not be allowed by
5 1 1/2 Inch UPVC Pipe 16 Run considering difficulty of pulling cable
through the accessories as it will lead to
6 2 Inch UPVC Pipe 24 Run damages on insulation layer of cable
7 2 1/2 Inch UPVC Pipe 41 Run
8.12.9.4 Direct installation of uPVC pipe with the roof will not be allowed need to provide AAC Blocks as a holding supports
AAC Blocks shall be fixed with RCC Roof by using the mortar supplied by the OEM. These are the minimum required size of AAC blocks "width of AAC blocks shall be 150 mm, Length as per the requirement / site condition, height
8.12.9.5
100 mm minimum.
8.12.9.6 On the AAC Block, the uPVC pies shall be fixed with the SS Clamps, thickness of SS Clamps shall be "1 mm thickness".
8.12.9.7 To fix the SS Screw with AAC blocks shall be done by using "nylon Rawal-plugs" with suitable grip and length.
8.12.9.8 Also, there should not be any sharp edges on the conduit as well on its accessories

8.12.10 Conduits -DWC Conduit (HDPE Pipe, UV Resistant)

DWC Conduit shall be used to handle the DC Cable in the plant area on all kind of installation i.e., Raised Structure, Car Port, Ground mount Installation, Metal roofs and underground installation as well DWC conduits can be used up
8.12.10.1
to the last walkway edge in solar array(towards inverter) & beyond that tray will be used.
8.12.10.2 The below mentioned specification are only applicable for the procurement process only, refer the section "8.13.5.2.3.3" for better understanding of its installation arrangement as required for BECIS.
8.12.10.3 The DWC Conduit (HDPE Pipe) - Dual Wall Corrugated Conduits in black colour, with UV Resistant properties are must be used.
All kind of accessories which will be used on the DWC Conduit (HDPE Pipe, UV Resistant) installation should have same material properties as like conduits (i.e., UV resistant) (accessories are including L Bend, T Bends, Couplers
8.12.10.4
and Holding Clamps)
The inner diameter of the conduit shall be selected by considering the allowed fill factor (i.e., 40%. for example only "14 Runs of DC 6 mm OD Cable" can be laid in 38 mm ID/50 mm OD DWC Conduit).
8.12.10.5
Outer diameter of the conduit shall be suitable to passing through the obstacles which will be installed on the routing of conduit on metal roofs and other execution.
8.12.10.6 The conduit shall have suitable holding clamp with grip to hold the conduit on its position, it should not allow the movement due to climate changes and other mechanical movement if exists.
8.12.10.7 The material of holding clamp shall be similar to the conduit i.e.., HDPE, UV Resistant, also the same applicable for other accessories as well
8.12.10.8 There should not be any sharp edges on conduit surface, internal wall and also its accessories as well.
The coupling arrangement of accessories with conduit shall be done properly with proper over lapping distance as per OEM. It should not allow removable of conduit from accessories in any case or changes due to atmosphere
8.12.10.9
condition and other mechanical movement.
8.12.10.10 All accessories shall have 75 mm overlapping which is minimum requirement as per BECIS.

8.12.11 Flexible Conduit (UV Resistant)

8.12.11.1 UV Resistant Flexible conduit (PA6) should be used for the laying of single core cable (Earthing cable, AC Cable and DC Cable - where it is exposed to sunlight on roof area and near inverter).
8.12.11.2 Additionally, the same to be used at inverter station for installation of AC cable and DC Cable with Cable tray to improve the aesthetic view at these locations.
8.12.11.3 When these conduits will be connected with the cable tray shall be done by using the OEM supplied gland with proper locking arrangements

8.12.11.4 All conduits should be installed on the roof/support with good engineering manner. Gland (Suitable for the conduit) should be recommended to use along with conduit for the DC Cable/AC Cable entry and exist point in the tray.

The selection should be done by considering Bending radius of cable and the should be selected on the basis of maximum 40% fill criteria, The conduit should be fixed with equipment's (like Tray, Combiner panel, Isolator) by using
8.12.11.5
proper and suitable Gland accessories.
8.12.11.6 All the conduits, where ever it will be used in the plant area, should be same length to ensure the aesthetically fine.
Document No. IN-EN-MD-001
Page 12 of 37
Technical Specification Rev. 3_Q4-24

Date 28-Oct-24

General Requirements There should be proper fixing and joining arrangement between the flexible conduit and the conduit which is carrying the cables, it should double ensured or the suggested method by BECIS to be followed. Also, the following
mentioned length only to be used in respective areas, to make the view aesthetically looks fine

1. DC Cable in inverter location - 1 m, or as per inverter stand height, all the conduit to be in similar heights
8.12.11.7
2. AC Cable As required, Max 1 m
3. Communication Cable - Only to be used at inverter location

The opening to be packed by using forms there should not be any provision and arrangement to store the rain water.

8.13 Cables
All standards, specifications and codes of practice referred to herein should be the latest editions including all applicable official amendments and revisions as on date of opening of bid. In case of conflict between this specification and those (IS: codes,
8.13.1
standards, etc.) referred to herein, the former shall prevail. All the cables shall conform to the requirements of the following standards and codes
8.13.1.1 DC cable for photovoltaic system TUV specification 2 Pfg 1169/08.2007, EN50618
8.13.1.2 PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric cables for working voltages up to and including 1100V. IS :1554 - I
8.13.1.3 Recommended current ratings for cables IS : 3961
8.13.1.4 Low carbon galvanised steel wires, formed wires and tapes for armouring of cables. IS : 3975
8.13.1.5 PVC insulation and sheath of electrical cables. IS : 5831
8.13.1.6 Cross linked polyethylene insulated PVC sheathed cables for working voltages up to and including 1100V. IS:7098 (Part -I)
8.13.1.7 Conductors for insulated electrical cables and flexible cords IS : 8130
8.13.1.8 Specification for drums for electric cables. IS : 10418
8.13.1.9 Methods of tests for cables. IS : 10810
8.13.1.10 Standard test method for density of smoke from the burning or decomposition of plastics. ASTM-D -2843
8.13.1.11 Tests on gases evolved during combustion of electric cables. IEC-754 (Part-I)
8.13.1.12 Tests on electric cables under fire conditions. Part-3: Tests on bunched wires or cables (Category-B). IEC-332
The cables should be suitable for laying on racks, in ducts, trenches, trestles, conduits and under ground buried installation with chances of
8.13.1.13
flooding by water.

8.13.1.14 Copper/aluminium conductor used in power cables shall have tensile strength as per relevant standards. Conductors should be multi stranded

8.13.2 Cables of appropriate size to be used in the system shall have the following characteristics
8.13.3 Excellent resistance to heat, cold, water, oil, abrasion, UV radiation
8.13.4 Installation must be executed as per the IS standard IS 1255.

8.13.5 DC Cable
8.13.5.1 Design Requirement
Approved part number of DC cable from an approved OEM must be used for all type of interconnection & terminations for DC side of solar PV Plant. Refer the attached BOM for the clarification of an approved OEM and part number
8.13.5.1.1
of DC Cable.
8.13.5.1.2 Minimum acceptance criteria of DC cable are as follows
1. Annealed Tinned Flexible Copper Conductor
2. Electron Beam Cross Linked XLPO Insulated Inner Sheath
3. Electron Beam Cross Linked XLPO Insulated, Halogen free, Flame Retardant Outer Sheath
4. Resistant to Anti-Rodent and Anti-Termite attacks
5. Single Core, Flexible
6. Rated Voltage : 1.0/1.0kV AC, 1.5kV DC

7. Temperature Range:
i) Ambient Temperature :- -40°C to +90°C
ii) Max Temperature at Conductor :- 120°C
iii) Max. Continuous Working Temp :- 120°C
iv) Max. Conductor Temp at Termination of Short Circuit :- 250°C

8. Other Specification - Generally as per EN 50618 and TUV Specification

9. Resistance against UV, Water, Ozone, Fluids, Oil, Salt & General Weathering
10. Low Smoke Emission Fire Retardant to meet IEC 607541-1/ EN 50268-2 RoHS Compliant as per EU norms
11. Black jacket with different colour inscription for both polarities :- Black with Red Stripe (+ve)/ Black (-ve)
8.13.5.1.3 DC cable size selection shall be based upon voltage drop values below specified limit in section "6.1.4.11.3" and other relevant design calculation (if any)
8.13.5.1.4 Using same cable for both polarity will not be allowed by considering the requirement of BECIS.
Proper identification on the cable at both ends to be done by using the suitable ferrules (I#S#PorN##M - "# to be replaced with numbers as per sequence).
8.13.5.1.5
(** The Unused MPPT/String number shall be mentioned on the as-built SLD for future reference)
8.13.5.2 Installations Guidelines of the DC cable:-

8.13.5.2.1 General Arrangement (Applicable for all kind of Installation)

8.13.5.2.1.1 The PV Module array design shall be done in such a way to ensure easy access to the string ends on array layout also enough space for installing DC Cable carrying mediums (i.e., Conduit/Tray/uPVC Pipe)
8.13.5.2.1.2 Additionally, basic requirement (as mentioned below) should be considered to avoid obstacles during execution and operation.
All the string exit point (i.e., for both polarity) on the module end should come close to the walkway (i.e., where the person easily stand and carry out the execution & maintenance activity).
a
All the internal wiring on the string should be done in such a way (Avoid looping on DC Side stringing at module level, try to do string with the cable supplied with module)
In case if the external cable connections are required for the stringing purpose (i.e., Module to module series cable), it has to be done in a good engineering manner and proper workmanship after taking clear approval from BECIS
b
deign team / QC. Also, should be incorporated in DC string for future reference.
c The daisy chain technique to be followed for stringing (on all kind of installation). Module from same string to be placed either LHS or RHS side of walkway the layout shall be designed in such a way
d The Positive and Negative cables from the string need to came out from the closest modules only.
Stringing cable of modules to be dressed to avoid the pressure at the cable's bend's & near junction box. Bending radius of the cable should be maintained as per the OEM of the manufacture. The bends shall be done in 60, 90, 120 Deg
8.13.5.2.1.3
Angular bends only.
8.13.5.2.1.4 The dressing below the module to be done by using the combination of dressing clips (4 Nos) & UV Resistant Nylon Cable Ties (3 Nos).
8.13.5.2.1.5 DC cable installation over roof shall fulfil BECIS technical requirement & also mindful of aesthetics to maximum extend.
8.13.5.2.1.6 The following grouping arrangement must be done for the DC cable Carrying medium (applicable for all the type of installation i.e., Metal Roof, RCC Roof, Ground Mount & Raised Structure)
There should be a complete isolation between both polarities of DC cable (i.e., Separate DWC conduit / Cable Tray / UPVC Pipe for Positive & Negative), this is applicable between module end and inverter station irrespective of
a
type of roof/installation.
Inverter wise grouping shall be done for DC Cable Handling medium (i.e., DWC / uPVC Conduit)

For example, the conduit / carrying mediums quantity will be 4 runs for two inverters, like (i.e.,,
1 - To carry positive polarity DC Cables of Inverter Number 1,
b 2 - To carry negative polarity DC Cables of Inverter Number 1,
3.- To carry positive polarity DC Cables of Inverter Number 2, and
4 - To carry negative polarity DC Cables of Inverter Number 2.)

(* No need to separate cables in the tray for achieving inverter wise grouping, where the single cable tray will be used for both polarity).
Document No. IN-EN-MD-001
Page 13 of 37
Technical Specification Rev. 3_Q4-24

Date 28-Oct-24

General Requirements
Few Installation Guidelines for DC Cable:

1. UV-resistant conduit should be used on the roof and in all other areas where the DC cable may be directly exposed to sunlight. The UV-resistant conduit should be properly fixed to the roof using intermediate supports and HDPE/SS
clamps.

2. The fill factor (40%) should be considered when selecting all types of DC cable installation conduits, as overloading will not be accepted. Additionally, a sufficient gap should be allowed for conduit installation during the initial
layout to avoid inconvenience at later stages.

3. Printed ferrules should be used for all strings at the inverter end as well as on the roof (close to each string). The same type of marking should be applied to looping cables as well.

4. Cable dressing below the modules should be done properly so that cables do not touch the sheets. Cables should be dressed securely using dressing clips and ties.
8.13.5.2.1.7
5. Dressing clips must be SS 304/316, and the size of the clips should match the outer diameter of the DC cable. Sharp edges should be avoided to prevent cable damage.

6. Cable ties used to secure the cables should be UV-resistant. Specifications and details of cable ties and clips should be shared for approval.

7. Proper bends and couplers should be used when installing DC conduits. Couplers must be installed every 30 meters along the DWC conduit (HDPE pipe, UV-resistant) to allow for access during maintenance.

8. Tags with inverter details should be used for conduit identification. Generally, overlapping of DC conduits should be avoided. If space constraints require overlapping, approval should be obtained from BECIS for deviations.

9. DC cable laying/installation on roof without a medium like UV Resistant Conduit/HDG tray is not allowed, and every conduit and tray should be fixed with roof in appreciable manner.

10. A Separate DC cable tray to be used for positive and negative from roof edge to location of the inverter, on the inverter stand the positive and negative can be merged as the same need to be connected with inverter by using a UV
Resistant Flexible conduits along with glands. (Pls Note:- The Gland to be fixed on the colour sides of the HDG cable Tray).

Separate conduits should be used for individual inverters, from string end point of the string to edge of the roof. Positive & negative DC cable should be routed through separate DC conduit. After the edge, the separate DC Cable Tray
8.13.5.2.1.8
(HDG) should be used to till inverters, and UV resistant flexible conduits along with gland should be used to get the DC cable out from the cable tray (to maintain the aesthetical view near the inverter location).

8.13.5.2.2 Installation of DC Cable Near inverter Stand

8.13.5.2.2.1 While installing the DC cable in the inverter location the aesthetical arrangement shall be taken in the account, as the inverter station will be treated as main assembly point.
8.13.5.2.2.2 To improve the aesthetical arrangement at inverter station, the following material must be considered along with its proper installation arrangement (reference photos will be shared if it is required)

Sr. No Material Description Purpose of using

At inverter station, combined cable tray can be installed for both polarities and all inverters.
1 The tray size must be selected as per the design calculation of considering 40% fill factors
A Combined, HDG Perforated Type Cable Tray With Cover.
2 The grouping of polarities and inverter should be done inside trays.
1 A suitable size of UV resistant, flexible, nylon (PA6) to be used at the inverter stand to brought out the DC string cable from
(** Design parameter, 40 % of fill factor to be considered while selecting the 3
width of cable tray). combined cable tray
4 The collar of the cable tray should be 75 mm to provide space to fix the flexible conduit's gland.
5 Cable tray and its all accessories should be installed in good engineering manner
In order to improve the aesthetic view on the inverter station, it is strictly recommended to use an UV Resistant flexible conduit with
2 UV Resistant Flexible Conduit with Glands
gland while taking out DC cable out of tray.
Proper cable tray support arrangement of HDG steel material should be considered on stand while designing.
3 Supporting Arrangement of Cable Tray
(** Exception to steel supports wherever required after approval from BECIS QC team)
Refer following section "8.13.5.2.3" for the specification and minimum requirement on installation arrangement of DC cable carrying mediums, i.e., HDG Cable tray, DWC Conduit (HDPE Pipe, UV Resistant) and UPVC Pipe (i.e.,
8.13.5.2.2.3
DC cable carrying medium)
8.13.5.2.3 Installation of DC Cable On Roof/Plant Area
The DC cable shall be installed on the plant area by following one of below methods, the mentioned minimum requirements area per BECIS should be considered.
8.13.5.2.3.1 The DC cable carrying medium will be changed as per project requirement,
Please Note:- There might be a requirement of using cable tray as per client's requirement on special case, hence recommended getting confirmation from BECIS).
8.13.5.2.3.2 The arrangement below-mentioned shall be used between modules end and edges of the metal roof (Close to the inverter location). After edge, the installation should be done by using the cable tray till inverter station
8.13.5.2.3.3 Installation of DC cable with DWC Conduit (HDPE Pipe, UV Resistant)
8.13.5.2.3.3.1 These arrangements are generally recommended for the installation of DC cable on the metal roof only (i.e., trapezoidal and Standing seam roof).
The DWC Conduit (HDPE Pipe, UV Resistant) - Dual Wall Corrugated Conduits in black colour, with UV Resistant properties are recommended to use for the DC cable carrying purpose. The size of conduit to be selected by
8.13.5.2.3.3.2
considering the 40% fill factor.
Cable conduits shall have a holding support at bottom to achieve clearance & avoid interference with walkway/lifeline/MMS/water pipeline/utilities. The support material surface finish shall be HDGI & it can be flat/ISMC/Z section.
8.13.5.2.3.3.3
The sample arrangement to be approved by BECIS site engineer/QC.
Fixing arrangement of holding supports should be in good engineering manner with water sealing arrangement, i.e., EPDM Sheet & Silicon sealant. (Please Note:- The fixing arrangement with the roof should be done with Adhesives if
8.13.5.2.3.3.4
in the case where there is no permission to penetrate on the roof)
Added to the arrangement of installation, the height of the holding support should be lesser than the top pane area of PV Modules to avoid shading issue on the PV module's edges. The recommended height is 40 mm from top of the
8.13.5.2.3.3.5
crest.
8.13.5.2.3.3.6 Fixing arrangement of holding support shall be done by using rivets along with water sealing arrangement to avoid the leakage in the future. BECIS QC will allow adhesives to fix holding support to non-penetrative roof.
8.13.5.2.3.3.7 On the holding support the DWC Conduit (HDPE Pipe, UV Resistant) holding clamps can be fixed with Self tapping screw.
8.13.5.2.3.3.8 It is recommended to use one coupler after every 30 meters interval
There will be perpendicular crossing of the conduit since we are installing separate conduits for both polarities. These kinds of crossing to be done by using the combinations of T Bends and L Bends, to avoid maximum stress at
8.13.5.2.3.3.9
crossing locations.
8.13.5.2.3.3.10 Also, using Tee and L bends for crossing of conduits with obstacles might lead an issue with shadow. Hence, the cable tray shall be extended on bracing in such a location.
DWC conduit shall not be routed upright vertical except at parapet crossing etc. It is always suggested to cross the wall by making a pass through hole on the wall. Structural support of maximum 1.5 m will be permitted by BECIS site
8.13.5.2.3.3.11
engineer if required.
The number of runs of DWC Conduit (HDPE Pipe, UV Resistant) will turn into huge number while proceeding installation as per the BECIS requirement (i.e., when we are using the individual conduits for the different polarity and
8.13.5.2.3.3.12 inverter wise grouping), hence it is recommended to use the HDG cable tray between edge of roof and inverter station. (Please Note: - Isolation between polarity is required for these trays, get the reference drawing for better
understanding).
When the DC Cable is going to be transferred into the cable tray from conduit, the joints must be planned in such a way where the DC cable will not be exposed to the direct sunlight, there should not be any sharp edges and it must
8.13.5.2.3.3.13
have a proper water sealing arrangement at the edge of cable tray ((Foam sealant to be filled, edges must be extended to overlap inside the tray).
8.13.5.2.3.3.14 The Entry of DWC Conduit (HDPE Pipe, UV Resistant) (at the edge area) must be done through the collar of HDG Cable tray hence, the collar must 75 mm height.
8.13.5.2.3.3.15 The vertical run of the conduit (after PV array) to be planned and installed in such a way to avoid issue at the entry into cable tray.
8.13.5.2.3.3.16 At entering point of string cable into the DWC Conduit (from module JB) T Bend & a short extension pipe pieces to be used below the module and dressed with module frame by using the UV resistant cable ties.
8.13.5.2.3.3.17 Additional to the dressing arrangement, then end must be arrested with the water sealing arrangement (i.e., it should be filled with silicon sealant)
The conduit to be installed on/crossed above the utilities (walkway, MCS system and safety net) when the conduit runs perpendicular. Necessary crossing arrangement should be provided as per EHS requirement.(Please Note:-
8.13.5.2.3.3.18
Selection of member, general arrangement must be verified and validated through BECIS QC/Site engineer).
8.13.5.2.3.3.19 There should be clearance of 100 mm between parallel runs of conduits, it shall be considered in "array layout "design.
8.13.5.2.3.3.20 The holding support of DWC Conduit (HDPE Pipe, UV Resistant) should be fixed on the "AL Clamps - Similar to MMS" for the installation on the standing seam metal roof. All other terms are as applicable
8.13.5.2.3.4 Installation of DC cable With HDG Cable Tray
8.13.5.2.3.4.1 The DC cable can be laid in the cable tray in routing between module end and the inverter station.
8.13.5.2.3.4.2 The recommended holding support should be provided for the installation of cable tray w.r.t the roof type and needed arrangement
8.13.5.2.3.4.3 DC cable entry and exit from the tray should be done by using "UV Resistant Flexible Conduit with OEM Supplied Glands".
The size (width) of cable tray must be selected by considering the no of run which will be laid in the tray, and about the height it supposed to be selected by considering the gland size which will be fixed on the collar for DC cable entry
8.13.5.2.3.4.4
from the module area.
8.13.5.2.3.4.5 The collar height of tray shall be 50 mm (*minimum) as these space require to fix the gland with tray for DC Cable entry/exit.
Always single layer of tray installation shall be considered at all the location as installation of tray in tier basis will lead an issue at time of operation. Multi layer (tiers) of installation shall be done after getting proper approval from
8.13.5.2.3.4.6
BECIS. Also, the minimum space between tires should be equal or greater than 300 mm.
Direct installation of cable tray with the roof will not be allowed by considering the issue with leakage and other concerns/requirement of BECIS. Hence, a holding support shall be provided while fixing of cable tray with the roof i.e.,
8.13.5.2.3.4.7
GI Roof, Standing Seam Roof, RCC Roof and Raised Structure. Refer the below matrix for the better understanding of the required arrangement

8.13.5.2.3.4.8 There shall be 50 mm clearance behind/below cable tray i.e., from bottom side to provide the space for future maintenance and operational needs, hence the section size of holding supports shall be selected according to the same.

The holding supports material should be MS Material the section shall be a Cable Tray stand, Z - Support, L Angle, and C - Channel with Hot Dip Galvanized in 80 Micron Thickness. Higher thickness i.e., 100 Micron of coating shall
8.13.5.2.3.4.9
be required for the site which is near to the creek and sea within 20 KM radius.

8.13.5.2.3.4.10 The fixing arrangement of cable tray with the holding supports shall be done by using the SS Fasteners only, using of Self-Tapping Screw shall be avoided as it is damaging the insulation layer of cables on long-time basis.

8.13.5.2.3.4.11 Sr. No Location of Installation - Cable Tray Required Holding Supports & Installation Arrangement
Cable Tray stand, Z - Support, L Angle, and C - Channel shall be used as a holding support for tray to fix with the roof
The holding support shall be anchored with the beam, column and on the side wall where it is going to be installed on the vertical run

1 RCC Roof The holding support shall be left without anchoring when it will be installed on the horizontal arrangement as it will be rested proper with cable weight itself.
Alignment shall be verified and ensured properly.

(* Additional support, from metal, RCC Beam, column or solar structure shall be given by extending to arrest movement of tray)
Document No. IN-EN-MD-001
Page 14 of 37
Technical Specification Rev. 3_Q4-24

Date 28-Oct-24

General Requirements 2 Raised Structure The tray can be fixed directly to the structure members by ensuring fixing methodology. Structure stability calculation shall be verified and ensured before installation.
3 Metal Roof
Cable Tray stand, Z - Support, and C - Channel shall be used as a holding support for tray to fix with the roof
3.1 Trapezoidal Roof
The holding support shall be fixed with the purlin by using self-tapping screw along with water sealing arrangements
Standing Seam Cable Tray stand, Z - Support, and C - Channel shall be used as a holding support for tray to fix with the roof
3.2
Roof The holding support shall be fixed with the seam by using AL clamps in a same way how Module mounting structure installed.
Cable Tray stand, Z - Support, L Angle, and C - Channel shall be used as a holding support for tray to fix with the roof
Brick Wall - Horizontal & Vertical
The holding support shall be fixed with brick wall by using "Nylon Anchors or Other Suitable Anchor fasteners as per OEM". Material shall be SS, Carbon Iron, or Zinc
Installation
4 Coated.
(** Applicable for Trench as well) Length and diameter of the anchor fasteners shall be selected as suitable for the requirement as per site condition and load bearing calculation of cable tray (* Consider cable
weight while selecting the fasteners)
The fixing arrangement of the holding support must be done by using the water sealing arrangement (i.e., silicon sealant & EPDM Sheet). The adhesive can be used to be fixed with the roof if in the case where we have not received
8.13.5.2.3.4.12
permission to penetrate the roof.
Once the holding supports were fixed, then the SS fasteners (refer "8.14 - Fasteners") to be used for the tray to fix the cable tray with holding supports. Using "Self Tapping Screw" must be avoided, as it can cause damage to insulation
8.13.5.2.3.4.13 layer.
The "no of fasteners" to be selected w.r.t width of cable tray, for example minimum "2 no's" of fasteners must be used at a connection points when the width of tray equal and greater than 100 mm.
8.13.5.2.3.4.14 Inside area of the tray must be free from Sharp edges which can lead damage to cable insulation
The width of cable tray can be varied as per the requirements (i.e., No of runs of DC cable). The straight joints on the tray can be considered where the size got reduced and increased as per the requirement.
8.13.5.2.3.4.15
The joints between the tray should be done by using a coupler plates and SS Fasteners.
8.13.5.2.3.4.16 Also, it is recommended to use the proper site fabricated reducer section where there is changes on the width in straight lines.
8.13.5.2.3.4.17 It is strongly recommended to use the proper fabricated joints, L bends, T bends and all accessories in the cable tray.
8.13.5.2.3.5 Installation of DC cable With UPVC Pipe (on RCC Roof)
8.13.5.2.3.5.1 These arrangements are recommended for installation of DC cable over the RCC roof
"uPVC Pipe - SCH 40" must be used with all suitable accessories as per requirement. When the selection of accessories (L Bend, T Bend, Coupler & Reduce) there should not be any sharp edges (internally) as it can damage the
8.13.5.2.3.5.2
insulation layer easily.
8.13.5.2.3.5.3 The Size of uPVC pipe to be selected by considering fill factor (i.e., 40 %, refer above matrix for allowed no of runs w.r.t the conduit size)
8.13.5.2.3.5.4 An AAC blocks (200 mm Width, minimum, x 100 mm Height) to be used as a holding supports to the UPVC pipe. The AAC blocks to be fixed with the roof by using the adhesives supplied by OEM.
8.13.5.2.3.5.5 Fixing of UPVC pipe on AAC Blocks to be done with SS Clamps, SS Screws & Nylon Raw plug.
8.13.5.2.3.5.6 These supporting arrangement to be provided at every 1 meter interval to ensure the proper alignment.
8.13.5.2.3.6 Installation of DC Cable - Under Ground
8.13.5.2.3.6.1 Installation of DC Cable under ground must be done by using "DWC Conduit - Double Wall Corrugated Conduit" as a DC Cable carrying medium between the Module end and the Inverter station.
8.13.5.2.3.6.2 DC cable laying arrangement where DC Cable will be directly exposed to the sunlight will not be accepted. Everywhere it should be laid through the Conduit only.
8.13.5.2.3.6.3 These DC Cable loaded conduit to be buried in the ground in "750 mm depth" (Refer the matrix added below for better understanding of depth which to be maintained for buried DWC Conduit)
8.13.5.2.3.6.4 All joints and couplings (such as T, L, and couplers) on the DWC conduit at the underground level must be covered with "3M tape" to prevent rodent entry and insulation faults.
8.13.5.2.3.6.5 A separate conduit to be used for the looping cable in the string. It should not be routed through the main conduit which carrying the string cables from modules end to inverter station.
8.13.5.2.3.6.6 Dressing arrangement of looping conduit also can be done by similar way as suggested for the main DWC Conduit (HDPE Pipe, UV Resistant) installation.
8.13.5.2.3.6.7 The stringing cable (which comes with PV Modules) to be dressed with the modules frame by using the dressing clips and UV resistant cable ties as per BECIS requirement.
8.13.5.2.3.6.8 When the DWC Conduit (HDPE Pipe, UV Resistant) installing vertically (in both ends) on the MMS Colours it is recommended to fix the same with Column by adding additional holding supports (I.e., HGDI strip /flat).

8.13.5.2.3.6.9 Fixing arrangement of holding support with MMS should be done by using the SS fasteners, and making hole on the column. When forming a hole on column, the cutting edges should be treated with rust prevention paint.

8.13.5.2.3.6.10 DWC Conduit (HDPE Pipe, UV Resistant) fixing with the holding support should be done by using the HDPE Clamps with grips (i.e. Internal rib profile supplied by DWC pipe manufacturer)
8.13.5.2.3.6.10 Minimum requirements for "underground buried routing of DWC conduits" are listed below. It is applicable once vertical routing ends.
a 150 mm length of water sealant tape to be used on the joints of Conduit bend, Tee bend, Couplers to avoid water ingress inside conduit. It to be fixed on both sides of joints.
b The DWC Conduit (HDPE Pipe, UV Resistant) to be buried at a depth of 750 mm in the plant area (applicable for all location)
The DWC Conduit (HDPE Pipe, UV Resistant) to be buried at 1200 mm depth, where there is road or heavy vehicle movement. Additionally it is recommended to use the half round Hume pipe and warning tape where over
c
cable after sand beds.
d Underground buried cable trench shall be backfilled with material free from sharp objects /any material .to ensure no damage/deterioration of cable conduit & insulation of cable.
Cable route marking shall be installed at every 5-meter interval. The marker should have a direction of cable laid & voltage rage. It shall be fixed properly with 300 mm height PCC which will help to prevent freely
e
movement.
8.13.5.2.3.7 Installation of DC Cable - Ground Mount Structure
8.13.5.2.3.7.1 The DC cable installation on the ground mount system shall be done by fulfilling the following requirement. The deviation from these minimum requirement can't be allowed.
8.13.5.2.3.7.2 Both (i.e., Conduits of positive & negative polarity) DWC - Double Wall Corrugated Conduit can be fixed with the purlin by using "UV resistant Cable ties". The ties shall be done in every "800 mm" interval
8.13.5.2.3.7.3 Ends of DWC Conduit should not be directly exposed to the atmosphere, it must be covered below the modules, and filled with foam sealant to avoid water from getting in.
8.13.5.2.3.7.4 A separate conduit to be used for the looping cable in the string. It should not be routed through the main conduit which carrying the string cables from modules end to inverter station.
8.13.5.2.3.7.5 The Layout shall be designed in such a way that the modules on a row of MMS is containing same inverter to make sure the proper routing of DC Cable
Mixing of strings from other inverter in a row of MMS to be avoided to get segregate the DC Cable in inverter wise. Like in a row of MMS, the same inverters should start from RHS side after aligning all the string in a row then
8.13.5.2.3.7.6
another inverters strings should be placed.
While routing the DC Cable the following requirement of BECIS shall be taken on the consideration
8.13.5.2.3.7.7 1. Positive and Negative polarity of DC cable to be routed separately
2. Inverter wise segregation of DC cable to be done starting from string end and inverter station

8.13.5.2.3.7.8 The entry to the DWC conduit shall be done in a good engineering manner.
8.13.5.2.3.7.9 The ends of DWC Conduit should not be exposed to the open atmospheres it must be extended below the modules to avoid the water getting into the conduit after damaging the foam filled to cover the opening.
8.13.5.2.3.7.10 Fixing of DWC Conduit with MMS legs shall be done by using the UV resistant cable ties and must be fixed properly.
8.13.5.2.3.7.11 When the DWC Conduit (HDPE Pipe, UV Resistant) raising from underground area it must be fixed proper Tee Joints and bends to make good aesthetic view.
8.13.5.2.3.7.12 DC Cable Carrying Medium Selection Matrix w.r.t Installation Type
Refer following matrix for each roof type to select the DC Cable carrying medium based on Roof Type
8.13.5.2.3.7.13
(Please Note: - It might get changed as per project requirement, hence get an approval from BECIS design Team)
Sr. No Type of Installation Recommended DC Cable Carrying Medium With major Accessories Recommended installation Arrangement
AAC Blocks with 200 mm Width x 100 mm Height * "Length - As
1 RCC Roof uPVC Pipe - White - SCH 40 and SS Clamps
Required"
2 Routing on MMS (Below PV Module)
2.1 RCC Roof Installation DWC Conduit (HDPE Pipe, UV Resistant) - UV Resistant with Holding Dressing with Purlins by using UV Resistant Cable Ties
Supports (i.e., Strip, HDPE Clamps) Complete length of DC Cable which will be installed within the
2.2 Ground Mount Installation
structure must be routed through the DWC Conduit with proper
2.3 Raised Structure ** UV Resistant Cable Ties Can be used to hold the Conduit with Purlins dressing
3 Metal Roof
DWC Conduit (HDPE Pipe, UV Resistant) - UV Resistant with Holding
3.1 Trapezoidal Roof HDPE Clamps, Holding Supports to be used
Supports (i.e., Strip, C Channel, Z Support) & HDPE Clamps
DWC Conduit (HDPE Pipe, UV Resistant) - UV Resistant / Holding
3.2 Standing Seam Roof Supports (i.e., Strip, C Channel, Z Support) With HDPE Clamps, AL
Clamps Similar to MMS
Looping Cable - on string level, UV Resistant Flexible Conduit (PA6), Holding Supports & UV Resistant
4
between Junction box (if required) Nylon Cable Ties
DWC Conduit (HDPE Pipe, UV Resistant) - UV Resistant at depth of 750 1200 mm depth shall be maintained where there is road crossing to
5 Underground
mm & 1200 mm prevent from damage while heavy vehicle movement
6 Vertical drop HDG Perforated Cable Tray with Cover, & Supports Support shall be installed at every 1000 mm

8.13.6 AC Cable
8.13.6.1 Design Requirements - AC Cable
8.13.6.1.1 The following terms are the minimum required specification which to be fulfilled while selecting, purchasing & executing the AC cable in plant area. It must be followed/considered without deviating.
All AC cable in the plant area which will be used for Power Handling Purpose shall be a "1.1 KV grade, XLPE insulated, compact aluminium conductor/copper conductor, PVC inner-sheathed (as applicable), G I Flat
8.13.6.1.2
type armoured, PVC outer-sheathed conforming to IS:7098 (Part-I).
The terms, "Power Handling Purpose" defining here is the cable which will be used on following areas
1). Inverter to AC Combiner Panel (i.e., Solar LT Panel)
8.13.6.1.3
2). Solar LT Panel to Other Utilities Panel (if any) like Solar Generation Meter Panel, Billing Meter Panel and Injection
3). Power Source Supply to the Equipment's which will be installed in the plant area.
8.13.6.1.4 Un-Armed cable can be used after pursing proper approval from BECIS by submitting design calculation and other technical documents as per BECIS.
8.13.6.1.5 For small utilities power source carrying purpose, "1.1 kV, PVC Insulated, Flexible Copper (Class 5), with Armed, PVC insulated cable can be used after getting enough approval from BECIS.
8.13.6.1.6 Conductor material might change to the project respective, however the final approval shall be requiring from BECIS engineering team before proceeding further on selecting the cable size & its specifications.
Document No. IN-EN-MD-001
Page 15 of 37
Technical Specification Rev. 3_Q4-24

Date 28-Oct-24

General Requirements 8.13.6.1.7 AC cable sizing shall be done by considering the maximum allowed "Power loss" which is restricted below 2%. It is applicable starting from inverter to evacuation point of AC network
8.13.6.1.8 All the cables which will be used n the site to carrying the AC power shall be a armoured cable with Galvanized Steel Flat Strip as per IS 3975, IEC 60502-1
8.13.6.1.9 The cable which will be terminated in the inverter could be selected as per the recommendation of OEM, however the approval from BECIS shall require on it.
Regarding the insulation over the conductors shall be XLPE (Cross Linked Polyethylene (XLPE) as per IS 7098-1, IEC 60502-1, BS 7655) only. Inner sheath shall be wrap tape type & outer sheath shall have a UV-
8.13.6.1.10
stabilized.
8.13.6.1.11 XLPE insulation should be suitable for a continuous conductor temperature of 90 deg. C and short circuit conductor temperature of 250 deg C.
8.13.6.1.12 Single length must be used between the equipment's, joints in between will not be allowed, in addition, cable drum no. / Batch no. to be embossed / printed at every one meter on the outer sheath of the cable.
8.13.6.1.13 Two different size of cable will not be allowed to use when there is requirement of multi runs between same equipment.
8.13.6.1.14 The selected cable's Shall meet and comply the all requirement of IEC 60227/IS 694, IEC 60502/IS1554 standards
8.13.6.1.15 All cables shall meet the fire resistance requirement as per Category-B of IEC 332 Part-3
AC cable should be laid in the covered cable tray (HDG) at all places, refer the below required installation methods of AC Cables as per BECIS. The drawing along with the installation arrangement should be shared
8.13.6.1.16
for the review/approval purpose. Recommendation by the OEM shall be followed for the installation all type of power handling cables.
All AC Cable in the system of entire solar power plant to be terminated with the panel or in the equipment's shall be terminated by using LONG Barrel Al / Cu Ring Terminal along with its suitable fasteners. The
8.13.6.1.17
necessary action shall be planned while design of equipment's such as LT Panel, AC Isolator, and Other Electrical Panel.
8.13.6.1.18 It is strictly recommended to use the 3.5 Core or 4 Core cable for all kind of LT Cable application until unless there is specific requirements
8.13.6.1.19 When there is requirements of single core cable based on the project scale, it shall be used by the contractors by taking an approval from BECIS by submitting the proper specification sheets
The selected cable shall have above-mentioned minimum required specification with irrespective to no of cores i.e., XLPE Insulated, Armd, Cu / Al Cable will be require with PVC extruded inner and outer sheath cable
8.13.6.1.20
with specific colour codes for better identifications
8.13.6.1.21 When the single core cable will be used, the complete installation shall be dressed properly with help of Trefoil Clamps (Non-Magnetic Material) for the installation above ground

8.13.6.1.22 The grouping factors w.r.t to the installation arrangement must be considered in the design calculations and the same shall be submitted by the contractor for the review and approval purpose of BECIS engineering team

8.13.6.1.23 The termination of single core cable shall be done by using a proper recommended way as instructed by the OEM and BECIS

8.13.6.2 Installation of AC Cable - General

8.13.6.2.1 Installation of AC cable in the pant area shall be done by following terms mentioned here, deviation from mentioned minimum requirement will not be allowed by considering the importance of AC cable.
8.13.6.2.2 While installation the AC Cable, the practice mentioned in the "IS 1255 - 1983" shall be compliance (Including HT Cable)
8.13.6.2.3 Following method will be allowed for a successful installation of AC cable within plant location
Installation With Cable Tray
On raised Structure (Existing / New)
On a cantilever Support From Exiting Member/Brick Wall
Underground
On Hume Pipe
In addition to the installation method, the proper arrangement should be done for unwinding the cable from drum as it might lead to an issue with twisting which can cause the problem during its life cycle. Hence, it is
8.13.6.2.4
recommended to take necessary action to avoid the same.
8.13.6.2.5 Also, while laying cable on the surface, it should not be in contact with sharp edges as it directly can lead the damage to the insulation layer.
Please Note: - The following terms are applicable to the Armed Cables, when the Un Armed cable will be used in the plant area it should be laid through "Conduit" only. DWC Conduit with suitable accessories and
8.13.6.2.6
fixing arrangement can be used as a medium of cable carrying material for the case of "Un-Armed cable"
8.13.6.3 Installation of AC Cable - With Cable Tray
8.13.6.3.1 Installation of AC cable can be done by using the cable tray in the plant area as per the project requirements. The selection of cable tray shall be done by considering the terms mentioned in section "8.12.8"
Installation of cable tray directly on floor surface, directly of sheets surface of metal roof and brick wall must be avoided, all these places shall have a holding support in "Mild Steel, with 80 Micron thickness of Hot Dip
8.13.6.3.2
Galvanized treatment to prevent from corrosion" to fix the cable tray with surface.
Fixing arrangement of Holding Support and Cable tray must be done by using a SS Fasteners set which will not have a sharp edges. Using Self-Tapping Screw must be avoided as it causing damage to the installation
8.13.6.3.3
layers of cable's\
8.13.6.3.4 While installing AC cable, the single layer methodology are preferred one layer installation by considering easy access during its maintenance period.
In case if there is no space for installing the single layer, then the multi layer arrangement shall be planned & executed after getting proper approval from BECIS design team by submitting the drawing. Also, minimum
8.13.6.3.5
clearances as mentioned in code "IS 1255 - Practice of Cable installation" i.e., >= 300 mm will be require between both tiers
8.13.6.3.6 Additionally the supporting arrangement shall be done properly as per approved drawing.
8.13.6.3.7 It is recommended to follow below mentioned minimum required terms w.r.t. its installation type
8.13.6.3.8 On raised Structure (Existing / New)
Using newly fabricated structure arrangements are recommended for installing the AC cable for entire cable routing in the plant area. Also, Installation of structure should be done as per the approved drawing by
a
BECIS
b When there is space in the existing structure for installation the cable can be done by providing enough supporting and strengthening arrangement to the complete structure.
c The feasibility study of the existing structure shall be done, accordingly the design shall be done and implemented by taking necessary approval from BECIS and End-User.
d Fabrication of support should be done in the manner by fulfilling all requirements as per OEM guidelines like bending radius, grouping factor, spacing and clearance between cable to cable.

8.13.6.3.9 On a cantilever Support From Exiting Member/Brick Wall

a An another method of installing AC cable with cantilever support can be done as per the project requirements
b The cantilever support must be ins a Mild Steel, with 80 Micron thickness of Hot Dip Galvanized. It shall be installed with existing base by using an approved methodology
c The base material can be a Brick wall, or MS Structure. When it will be installed on a brick wall it must be fixed by using a proper anchoring arrangement.

d When the cantilever support will be fixed with an existing structure arrangement, then it must be welded properly by proving bracing support and other stability arrangement to avoid misleading of installation.

e Fabrication of support should be done in the manner by fulfilling all requirements as per OEM guidelines like bending radius, grouping factor, spacing and clearance between cable to cable.

8.13.6.3.10 Fixing Cable Tray With Support & AC Cable Laying

a As defined above, cable shall be supplied with required specification.
b The fixing arrangement of cable to be done on a well supported structure arrangement.
c Pre-fabricated cable tray bend shall be used which to be fabricated as per the requirements of bending radius
d All the joints on cable tray like tray to tray, tray with supports shall be done with good engineering manner and best practice.
e There should not be any sharp edges on inside the cable tray which can lead to damage to the cable.
f After laying of cable on the tray it to be dressing by using the "UV resistant Nylon Cable ties" at every 1000 mm internal. Using armour and other metal arrangement for dressing purpose should be avoided.\

Please Note: -
1. At the inverter station for AC cable entry to the tray, as mentioned in above section it is recommended to use suitable size of flexible conduit with its OEM supplied gland accessories.
g
2. The cable tray which will be installed on the inverter station for AC cable carrying shall be fixed in centre line to the cable exit from inverter, the cable should directly go in to the tray without having sharp
turning at these locations.

8.13.6.3.11 Above arrangements shall be done with subjected to the approval and as per project requirement, the necessary approval from both party shall be done before initiating the execution work at site

8.13.6.4 Installation of AC Cable - Underground

8.13.6.4.1 As an another method, the AC cable installation can be done by directly burring in the ground by following below mentioned terms and OEM guidelines
The laying depth of AC Cable shall be done as per the guidelines given on the code "IS1255 - Practice of Cable installation" which is including for HT Cable. For example While going buried application of the "LT
8.13.6.4.2
Cable, 1.1 kV, to be laid in depth of 750 mm" by having enough clearance between other cable which will laid in same trench
8.13.6.4.3 For fast heat dispersion of AC cable should be submerged in the sand bedding, the minimum height of sand bend should be 50 mm in each side.
8.13.6.4.4 Over the sand bedding, bricks to be laid along the length and breadth of the trench, to protect the cable from external disturbances like vehicle movement and other activities.
8.13.6.4.5 Area after bricklayer of trench to be filled with loose soil which is removed while digging, it should not have any sharp edges which can cause damages of cable's insulation layer.
8.13.6.4.6 The levelling & backing shall be done to match the terrain level, which should not form as a drainage during raining season.
8.13.6.4.7 For better identification of underground trench the "route marker" to be installed on every 10 Meters (in eye sight level) also, it should have symbol if direction and voltage rating.
8.13.6.4.8 Fixing of route marker should be fixed permanently on above the cable trench with a PCC layer.
The necessary activities should be taken while crossing with Other cables, railway track, road, gas/water pipeline. It is recommended to install the cable by passing through in a "Full round RCC Hume Pie (NP3
8.13.6.4.9
Grade)" on all these areas with proper installation as guided by BECIS design team. And these Hume pipe to be buried in depth of "1200 mm".
8.13.6.4.10 The turning radius, spacing between no of runs, spacing between other cables and other utilities shall be followed properly.

8.13.7 Communication Cable

All communicable equipment's to be connected with the data logger or remote monitoring unit by using one of following communication cable. Along with the cable type, mentioned selection criteria to be considered. Which is listed
8.13.7.1
below but not limited to the mentioned, it might vary site to site conditions
8.13.7.2 A separate route with proper arrangements shall be done for the communication cable when it will be routed in the Solar LT Panel and other panels
Document No. IN-EN-MD-001
Page 16 of 37
Technical Specification Rev. 3_Q4-24

Date 28-Oct-24

General Requirements RS 485 Cable:-

2 Pair, 24 AWG pair stranded (7 no's of 32 AWG strands/core) tinned copper conductors, polyethylene insulation, twisted pairs, overall Beldfoil (100% coverage) + tinned copper braid shield (90% coverage), 24 AWG stranded tinned
copper drain wire with PVC jacket cable should be used for communication. (i.e., 9842 to be considered for every looping with RS 485 Cable)

Few Selection criteria :-

8.13.7.3
1. If at any loop, starting to end point distance is more than 250 meter, the RS 485 signal booster need to be used in between, the specification of the booster will be confirmed during detailed engineering,

2. RS 485 cable have to be used for all the equipment which operates on Mod-Bus RTU communication protocol.

3. If at any loop, One pair cable need to be used for node up to 6 no's, Two pair cable need to be used where the number of node is more than 6, in both case the cable have to be routed with UV stabilized conduit, the proper fixing with
the existing medium has to be done, for Under ground installation (always) Armoured Cable (an additional) should be considered along with the UV Stabilized conduit.

Shielded CAT 6 Cable:-

23 AWG Solid Bare Copper (4 pair), High Density Polyethylene, 2 Insulated conductors twisted together, FR-PVC Insulation Thickness 0.2 mm with PVC jacket cable should be used for communication (if Required), The installation
must be done by using UV Stabilized conduit. the interconnection of the data logger should be connected with CAT 6 cable, and the Fibre Cable to be used b/w the datalogger if the distance is more than 80 meter.
8.13.7.4
Few Selection criteria :-

1. CAT 6 cable have to be used for all the equipment which operates on TCP/IP communication protocol

Armoured Optic Fibre Cable:-

Fibre Optic cable can be used in the plant (if required) for Indoor / Outdoor (duct) Local Area Network System, The property of cable should be Excellent Water Proof Layer & Good Moisture Resistance as per IEC : 60793-1 / 60794 -
1-2, Operating Temperature - -20 deg C to +60 deg C, Jacket Material HDPE.

Few Selection criteria :-

8.13.7.5
1. If the total length of any loop, is more than 600 meters, optical fibre cable need to be used.

** Using OFC will be preferred for ground mounted projects.

e.g. Armoured ,Multi mode 6 core ,6 Fibre, ECCS armoured, Multimode 50/125 OFC, Unitube design

The Shield of the communication should be connected with ground at one end to avoid the interference during the data transmission, also, there, the sufficient distance between AC Power cable, other charged cable and communication
8.13.7.6
cable, >= 300 mm.
All communication cable in the plant (at any location) should laid by using "UV Stabilized uPVC Conduit SCH 40 with Its Accessories", also it to be fixed with medium like wall/cable tray/mechanical support by using self tapping
8.13.7.7
screw or other removeable solution, the distance between two supports should not be more than 1000 mm.
The communication cable loaded uPVC Conduit to be buried in the ground at 500 mm depth while it be installed in the underground cable trench. Also, minimum 300 mm gap to be maintained between these conduits & other power
8.13.7.8
handling cable.
8.14 Earthing and Lightning Arrester
8.14.1 Earthing Pit & Electrode
Maintenance free chemical earth pit along with "Cu Bonded MS Rod, 3 Meter Long rod" as electrode should be supplied with suitable earth enhancing compound. The chemical electrode should be of non-corrosive min 25 mm dia,
8.14.1.1
Minimum copper coating should be 250 microns.
An individual earthing grid shall be prepared for with earthing electrode for all packages like DC earthing, AC Earthing, Communication Earthing and LA.
8.14.1.2
Each package shall have two or more earthing electrodes with parallelly connected, earthing through a single electrode will not be allowed in any case until there are special requirements.
8.14.1.3 Earth pit quantity shall be decided based on the short circuit current value (as per the calculation).
Earth enhancement material should be type tested from NABL accredited lab. Earth enhancement material should be superior conductive material so that it improves earthing effectiveness, especially in areas of poor conductivity (rocky
8.14.1.4
ground, areas of moisture variation, sandy soils etc.).
Earthing strip on roof and equipment should be suitable to carry the total fault current of the system, recommended size of strip should be used for earthing, anyhow the approval from the owner should be required for the layout and
8.14.1.5
arrangements.
8.14.1.6 The quantity of earth enhancing material required per earth electrode should be indicated. In general, minimum 50Kg earth enhancing compound should be supplied for each electrodes or as per OEM recommendation
8.14.1.7 Earth pit should be drilled and earthing electrode should be placed in the pit, filled with back filling chemical compound, all around the electrode as per manufacturer’s datasheet/ installation instructions provided by OEM.
8.14.1.8 Earth chambers of brick masonry should be constructed, HDG Covers with Hinges should be provided. Terminations at the electrode end should be made using bolting method. Welding shall not be allowed.
8.14.1.9 The quantity of earthing electrode should be decided as per the engineering calculation, which is approved during the detailed engineering, all work at site to be carried out at site as per the approved drawing of earthing system.
Earth Pit display board to be installed close to the earth pit along with the information of earth pits like, the name and number of earth pit, measured value and due date. The details should be printed on UV Resistant Foam board and
8.14.1.10
the value can be written by using a markers. The background must be in green colour and printing could be in while colours.
8.14.1.11 The earthing grid at ground level (in Underground) to be prepared before raising towards the roof or the equipment. More than one earthing electrode in individual package to be interconnected in parallelly.
8.14.1.12 All the earthing electrode shall be installed in the manner to provide easy access to measure the resistance value periodically.
8.14.1.13 There should be a proper isolation between the earthing electrodes of other packages.
8.14.2 Earthing Conductors
8.14.2.1 Earthing conductor shall be an aluminium, copper, and GI as per the project requirement mostly it must be a low resistance material with high electrical conductivity.
8.14.2.2 Earth Flat Size and Number of runs shall be decided based on the earthing calculation. As per BECIS, all the earthing flat shall have a "2 Runs". (Refer the below matrix for the size of earthing flat w.r.t roof type)
8.14.2.3 The coating (HDG) thickness of earthing strip shall be 80 Micron Minimum. When the site located close to the sea or within 20 KM, it might vary as per project requirement.
8.14.2.4 The earthing conductors can be installed horizontally, vertically as per the project requirement to extent the earthing connection to all the charged components as applicable.
All equipment (Power handling/Non-Power Handling units, including cable tray) in the plant must be connected with the earthing grid DC or AC by using an appreciate-able earthing conductors. The calculation or OEM
8.14.2.5
recommendation should be considered while selection of size and material of earthing conductors.
8.14.2.6 It is strongly recommended to use a epoxy insulator with SS fasteners with the earth strip while it will be installed/fixed with existing member. As it will be act as a support to the earthing conductors as well as isolation medium.
8.14.2.7 Suitable rated epoxy insulator in size also in capacity to be selected as per the requirement to the size of earthing conductors. It should be installed at every 1000 mm interval to avoid the sag issue.
8.14.2.8 Epoxy insulator to be used with the earthing conductor when it will be installed horizontally and vertically (downcomer).
8.14.2.9 Fixing arrangement of Earthing conductors shall be done by considering the method mentioned in the below matrix
8.14.2.10 Sr. No Roof Name / Installation Base Earthing Conductors Size Supporting Materials Span Remarks

25 x 3 mm thk GI Straps Suitable for 25 x 3 / 6 mm thk

SS Screw Width of AAC Blocks shall be minimum 150
1000 mm
25 x 6 mm thk Nylon Rawal Plugs mm to avoid cracks
1 RCC Roof
GI Straps Suitable for 50 x 6 mm thk (i.e., the support to be installed at
Dust on drilled hole to be cleared before
50 x 6 mm thk SS Screw every 1000 mm)
fixing screw with Rawal plugs
Nylon Rawal Plugs
Epoxy Insulators - base - 30 mm (for 25
25 x 3 mm thk Holding support shall be fixed with sheet by
mm) / 40 mm (for 50 mm width) earthing
using "Rivets" along with water sealing
conductors to be used with SS grade
1000 mm arrangement (i.e., EPDM Sheet and silicon
fasteners.
sealant).
2 Metal Roof - Trapezoidal Roof 25 x 6 mm thk
(i.e., the support to be installed at
Insulator to be mounted on holding
every 1000 mm) Chemical adhesive shall be used to fix the
supports i.e.,
holding supports with GI sheet If it is non-
50 x 6 mm thk Z, C Section and Strip of MS-HDG Steel
penetrative roof,
in required Size

Epoxy Insulators - base - 30 mm (for 25

25 x 3 mm thk mm) / 40 mm (for 50 mm width) earthing
conductors to be used with SS grade
1000 mm
fasteners. Holding support shall be fixed with sheet by
3 Metal Roof - Standing Seam Roof 25 x 6 mm thk using utility clamps in aluminium (i.e.,
(i.e., the support to be installed at
Insulator to be mounted on holding similar to the MMS).
every 1000 mm)
supports i.e.,
50 x 6 mm thk Z, C Section and Strip of MS-HDG Steel
in required Size

Epoxy Insulators - base - 30 mm (for 25

25 x 3 mm thk mm) / 40 mm (for 50 mm width) earthing
conductors to be used with SS grade
1000 mm
fasteners. Holding support shall be fixed with sheet by
4 Metal Roof - Standing Seam Roof 25 x 6 mm thk using utility clamps in aluminium (i.e.,
(i.e., the support to be installed at
Insulator to be mounted on holding similar to the MMS).
every 1000 mm)
supports i.e.,
50 x 6 mm thk Z, C Section and Strip of MS-HDG Steel
in required Size
Document No. IN-EN-MD-001
Page 17 of 37
Technical Specification Rev. 3_Q4-24

Date 28-Oct-24

General Requirements Epoxy Insulators - base - 30 mm (for 25

25 x 3 mm thk mm) / 40 mm (for 50 mm width) earthing
conductors to be used with SS grade
1000 mm
fasteners.
Holding support shall be fixed with MMS by
5 Raised Structure 25 x 6 mm thk
(i.e., the support to be installed at using self tapping screw.
Insulator to be mounted on holding
every 1000 mm)
supports i.e.,
50 x 6 mm thk Z, C Section and Strip of MS-HDG Steel
in required Size

25 x 6 mm thk Ends to be brought out from ground and

To be laid below ground at 500 mm
6 Under Ground - connected with MMS's legs by using SS
50 x 6 mm thk depth
Fasteners or weld.
To be used as a potential earthing and
Termination ends brought out from the laying
grid earthing of Transformer yard,
7 Transformer & Switchyard 75 x 12 mm thk - depth where the connections with the
Switchyard area, control room, and
equipment's needs to be done
central inverters
Connection between the earthing conductors in a stretch shall be done with "welding only" by considering the overlapping distance as mentioned below for each sizes.
1. 25 x 3/6 mm thk - 100 mm
8.14.2.11
2. 50 x 6 mm thk - 150 mm
Along with overlapping distance, the diagonal joints shall be done by using the same size of conductors for the perpendicular joints in a manner to increase the conductivity area.
8.14.2.12 The welding joints shall be painted with 2 coats of "Zinc Rich Aluminium Paint (ZINKOTE)". The joints below the ground shall be painted with the 2 coats of "Bituminous Paints" as a rust prevention arrangements.
8.14.2.13 The continuity shall be verified for each welding joints in front of BECIS Engineers before charging the system.
8.14.2.14 The proper isolation arrangement with non conducting material shall be done for the earthing conductors when it cross with other earthing circuit or with other utilities
8.14.2.15 There should be 75 mm gap between the runners of earthing conductors (applicable on vertical & horizontal) installation. 125 mm gap b/w earth conductors shall be maintained in case of different packages.
The following sizes to be used to form the earthing grid as well the mesh of earthing network
1. DC Earthing - 25 x 3 mm thk HDG Earth strip
2. DC Earthing - 25 x 6 mm thk HDG Earth strip (when it will be laid / installed within 2 meter above the ground and underground installation)
8.14.2.16 3. AC Earthing - 50 x 6 mm thk HDG Earth strip
4. LA Earthing - 50 x 6 mm thk HDG Earth strip
5. Trafo & Switchyard - 75 x 12 mm thk HDG Earth strip
6.Shield earthing -25mmx6mm thk HDG Earth strip

The above size are minimum requirement for mentioned packages like DC, AC, and LA. The proper calculation should be submitted with BECIS design team for validation, Additional runs / size shall be considered when there is
8.14.2.17 special requirement based on the calculation and other concerns. the material must be G.I, the same size of strip should be used for the SPV earthing on Roof and Vertical Conductors. Two runs (i.e. Two separate & distinct earth
strips) of strip must be used between the two roofs / MMS. In ground next size of strip should be used by considering corrosion of material over the operating period of the plant.

8.14.2.18 Along with sizes, all the vertical runners should have a two runs with a interconnection between the downcomers should be done in every 6 meters to ensure more secure path for the leakage currents.
In general LA Earth strip not to be connected with other earthing conductors. A separation distance of 250mm shall be maintained between LA down conductor & earthing conductors. If the separation distance is not maintained then
8.14.2.19
bonding conductors required between LA down conductors & another metallic part.
8.14.2.20 Tapping from the existing earthing conductors arrangements of off-taker must be avoided, all earthing should be done as per the calculation.
Marking should be done on the all earthing conductors, like "Green colour" for DC Earthing, "Yellow Colour" for AC Earthing and "Blue colour" for LA Earthing. The length of paint should be 100 mm, & it should be applied at
8.14.2.21
every 5 Meter frequent.
8.14.2.22 All welding, painting and other installation works on the earthing conductor should be carried out in a good workmanship manner to avoid a punch points on the same at later stages.
8.14.2.23 SCADA datalogger shield will be earthed at the nearest location using single earthing electrode. All PE connections of SCADA scheme shall be connected to nearest earthing conductor.

8.14.3 DC Earthing
8.14.3.1 Each PV Modules should be earthed by using 1C x 4 Sq.mm Cu (Flexible, Multi Stranded)/WEEB washer. The installation shall be done in manner of ensuring the equipotential bond between frames & leakage current path.
8.14.3.2 For PV Module earthing it is strongly recommended to use 1C x 4 Sq.mm Cu (Flexible, Multi Stranded, PVC Insulated or XLPO Insulated (Cut-Length of DC Cable).
8.14.3.3 Each module on the plant should have minimum two connection from DC earthing grid
8.14.3.4 UV resistant Flexible conduit shall be used while the cable is exposed to the sunlight more than 100 mm.
The method of earthing recommended by the manufacture (as per the OEM) should be considered and additionally a star washer should be used along with the fasteners to scratch the anodized layer of the PV Module's frame. Proper
8.14.3.5
arrangement and placing the washer should be done as per the good engineering manner.
The cable (at end) should be connected with earth strip (size as per the calculation) by using a separate fasteners & a insulator should be fixed in every 1000 mm to avoid the sag on run of earth strip on roof. Cu Ring terminal must be
8.14.3.6
used while termination with the earth strip & The fasteners must be SS 304 / 316 fasteners.
MMS of RCC Roof installation, ground mount and raised structure should be earthed and connected with DC System Earthing by using the same size of DC Earthing Strip. Proper arrangement of washer should be considered for the
8.14.3.7
MMS Earthing.

8.14.3.8 Connection between the array, set of modules or MMS Tables of RCC Roof, ground mount and raised structure installation shall be done with the earthing conductors (i.e., strip). Extending with copper wire will not be allowed.

8.14.3.9 Separate Earthing Pit (Maintenance Free) should be used for DC System Earthing as per the calculation.

8.14.4 AC and Equipment Earthing

8.14.4.1 AC Combiner Panel / PV Inverter / and other non-current carrying equipment's should be earthed properly as per IS:3043& OEM guidelines in installation manual.

Earthing of inverter shall be done as recommended by the OEM, generally, two separate runs of copper wires shall be used as "Protective Earth or PE" provided at internal or external connection points. Additionally the inverter
8.14.4.2
cabinet/frame should be connected to mounting structure by a short continuity conductor.
All the SPD (including all location) shall be earthed properly as recommended by the OEM and connected with "1Cx 16 Sq.mm Cu, Flexible, PVC Insulated, Green/Yellow Cable". By considering the aesthetical view, the 1C cable
8.14.4.3
shall be routed in a "UV Resistant Flexible Conduit" should be used for the cable.
Non-current carrying equipment's should be earthed by using G.I Flat, dual strip / connection should be used for the non-Current carrying the equipment's, also the earthing should be done in manner to avoid changes in degree of
8.14.4.4
protection for the equipment's.
8.14.4.5 All Encloser (Metal) should be earthed.
8.14.4.6 AC System Earth Strip should be installed on Roof / building / Mast / Wall by using Epoxy insulator, HDG Support stand should be provided to fix the epoxy insulators to fix with wall
8.14.4.7 All power supply unit, distribution boards, control units shall be earthed properly with its own grid or combined earthing system as approved by the BECIS
8.14.4.8 The individual earthing arrangement of street light pole shall be done by 1.8m deep earth pit & Class B GI Pipe as per IS3043

8.14.5 Lightning Arrester and Its Earthing

The lighting arrester should be used, compliance to as standards: UNE 21186 and NF C-17 102, All equipment in the plant should be covered under Level 1, additional LA should be provided if the plant is not covering in single LA.
8.14.5.1
Test reports as per NFC 17-102 shall be provided for selected LA model
Early Streamer Emission air terminal should be mounted on top of a mast of height 5 m minimum above ground level using HDG mast, Mast should be mounted on RCC concrete foundation pedestal or proper structural assembly,
8.14.5.2
Level 1 protection radius should be considered for the all Equipment's of PV Plant, SPV Modules according to IEC 62305-3
8.14.5.3 An additional LA should be required and provided in case the coving not done by 1 Qty. And also, the separation distance of LA Conductor to be maintained as per BECIS Design approval.
Earth Flat Size and Number of earth pit should be decided as per the calculation, the material of strip must be G.I, and two strip (i.e. Two separate & distinct earth strips) strip should be used for LPS Earthing, Air Terminal and Mast (if
8.14.5.4
applicable) should be isolated by using non-conducting material.
8.14.5.5 LA Mast should be checked for wind forces. Accordingly guy ropes support to be provided for LA. Guy rope should be SS304/SS316 material. Guy rope support should be HDG
8.14.5.6 LA foundation drawing & calculation should be done considering the reactions
8.14.5.7 A zero degree frame should be used for the installation of LA on the G I Roof, required design and calculation to be submitted along the set of drawing for the review and approval purpose of owner (BECIS).
8.14.5.8 An additional support to the guy rope, the tensioner (HDG) to be used to fix the guy rope with the HDG support.
All the Pv Plant equipment's including transformer yard, outdoor switchyard, control room shall be covered under the protection radius of LA System. A separate LA system along with proper earthing arrangement needs to provided if
8.14.5.9
it is faraway from the existing LA in PV Plant area.

8.14.6 Conventional LA & Its Earthing

8.14.6.1 As per BECIS requirements, an ESE-type Lightning Arrester (LA) must be considered to protect the plant from lightning strikes. However, at some sites, a conventional LA may be required to obtain CEIG approval.

8.14.6.2 In such cases, the following specifications should be considered, and the LA network system should be planned and executed in alignment with BECIS requirements

1. A conventional LA, based on the "Rolling Sphere Method" at Level 3 or 4, will be provided wherever mandatory. The Protection Angle Method may be used, based on the LA terminal height and angle, for
edge-side air terminals.
8.14.6.3
2. A minimum of 4 down conductors and 4 earth electrodes should be provided for each roof section.
3. Earth electrodes for the LA can be installed at a depth ranging from 1.8 m to 2.5 m, as surface resistivity is crucial for LA down conductors.

8.14.6.4 In addition to design and implementation, adequate space for installing earthing pits around the building must be ensured.

8.14.6.5 All earth pits used for the conventional LA should have a nameplate and be marked with specific details such as numbering, purpose, grid resistance, and testing date.

8.15 AC combiner Panel (LT Panel) and Breaker

8.15.1 The below-mentioned terms on its relevant section are minimum requirement which to be considered while designing the AC Side Combiner Panel (I.e., Solar LT Panel). Here onwards it will be called us Solar LT Panel.
8.15.2 All the terms are applicable to the Solar LT panel, also applicable for its relevant accessories AC Isolator, Power Evacuation Panel at/near injection point, Solar generation meter panel, and etc.., Deviation from the mentioned terms will not be allowed.
8.15.3 The AC Side (LT Side) Combiner panel shall be designed and supplied for the requirements of combining LT Side of two or more central inverter before connecting to the transformer.
8.15.4 Along with these requirements, a proper arrangement must be there within the panel to handle the auxiliary power requirement of PV Plant and its unit
Document No. IN-EN-MD-001
Page 18 of 37
Technical Specification Rev. 3_Q4-24

Date 28-Oct-24

General Requirements
8.15.4 Design Requirement

8.15.4.1 Mechanical Requirement

All metal parts on LT Panel shall be fabricated using suitable mild steel structural sections or pressed and shaped cold-rolled sheet steel, these are minimum required thickness (nominal) of structural requirement of LT Panel

1. Load bearing members 2.0 mm

2. Non-Load bearing members 1.6 mm
8.15.4.2
3. Gland Plate - 3 mm
4. Base frame/Mounting Stand - 5 mm
1. ISA 50 x 50 x 5 mm Thk for stand alone LT Panel
2. C Section ISMC 75 for floor mounted

Non-Load bearing Frames should be enclosed in cold-rolled sheet steel of thickness 1.6 mm (nominal). Doors and covers shall also be of cold rolled sheet steel of thickness 1.6 mm (nominal). The gland plate thickness should be 3.0
8.15.4.3
mm (nominal) for hot/ cold-rolled sheet steel and 3.0 mm (nominal) for non-magnetic material.
8.15.4.4 The complete structures should be rigid, self-supporting, and free from flaws, twists and bends. All cut-outs should be true in shape and avoid of sharp edges.
8.15.4.5 Additional stiffeners shall be fixed on behind the doors when the operation are not in up to the mark
The Combiner panel should be of dust-proof and vermin-proof construction and should be provided with a degree of protection of IP 65 as per IS: 13947. However, the bus bar chambers having a degree of protection of IP 4X are also
8.15.4.6
acceptable, Provision should be made in all compartments for providing IP 5X degree of protection
Housing of Switchgear in LT Panel shall be done as defined in IEC 61439-2. The approved separation form is "4b". Additionally, the following arrangement should be considered without fail.
1). All breaker to be mounted on the separate compartments including incoming breaker
2). Incoming and outgoing breaker should not be kept in a same vertical compartment, it is recommended to keep in adjutant side
8.15.4.7 3). Completely enclosed bus bar chamber
4). Separate Cable termination chamber (both incoming & Outgoing)
5). Separate metering compartment
6). Forced cooling arrangement with metal blade fan & louvers

8.15.4.8 The compartment size of incoming breaker shall be designed according to the OEM of switchgear, as per BECIS it should be >350 mm.
8.15.4.9 The width of incoming cable termination chambers shall be >=500 mm which will be provided LHS/RHS to incoming breaker or its rear side of incoming breaker with rear access
8.15.4.10 All the compartments shall be fitted with the hinge mounted door. The hinges shall be fixed with the panel's body by making enough space to fix the bubble gasket on each door
8.15.4.11 All the Cut-out will be made on the door shall be done with the proper arrangement or as per OEM requirement

8.15.4.12 The bellow are the minimum requirement which to be fulfilled w.r.t its installation location (i.e., Indoor or Outdoor), however the GA shall be submitted to BECIS design team for review and approval process before getting it initiation

8.15.4.13 Open/Outdoor Atmosphere

a There should be a external door on each section/combined section in the LT Panel with glass window, when it will be installed in outdoor location
b LT panel shall be supplied with the removal type sloped canopy (with 1:2 ratio) on top which is extended on 150 mm at least on all 4 sides

A Small projected type removeable canopy shall be fixed for following area to avoid water getting in through it.
1. Cooling fan unit
c 2. Louvers
3. Cut-out made for Earthing strip/stud
4. Other projected (if any)

d The Proper mounting stand with proper installation arrangement. All the cable entry to the LT Panel shall be taken from bottom of unit, hence the stand shall be prepared by considering the bending radius and all
f The glass window shall be provided on the external door on main outgoing breaker unit section (It could be smaller, to see have a view of meters, and indication lamps)
Each outdoor placed control /metering panel will have external overhead shed such that the panel front is under shadow from 10:30AM to 2:30PM. This is to avoid heat build up & reduce heating rate.
g Every outdoor panel shall have forced cooling arrangement based upon heat /joules calculations & volume. We recommend using MCB ,Digital programmable time & 8" Fan for each panel.
Number of sets will depend upon volume of panel & heat rise calculation. Final decision will be from BECIS design team.
8.15.4.14 Closed/indoor Atmosphere
a No need to provide the external doors. But the internal door (i.e., Compartment level door) shall be provided with bubble type gasket which should resist/prevent from water and dust getting into cabin
b No Need to provide the removal type sloped canopy on top, canopy for side mounted smaller things on the unit
c The cable entry can be planned as per the project requirement hence included here can be modified as per project requirement.
d The unit should have provision to install on the decided location
8.15.5 Mounting Arrangement
8.15.5.1 All the LT Panel and it accessories should comes with an appreciate able pre-fabricated mounting arrangement to make easy installation at site on decided location
8.15.5.2 Detailing of mounting arrangement should be shown on the drawing and it to be verified at site on the initial visit, in case of any deviation on it which to be taken care on further revision.
8.15.5.3 All kind of mounting arrangement shall be done in kind of removeable type which can be removed in future.
8.15.5.4 Mounting arrangement of LT Panel shall be done on the load bearing structure and the bending radius of Cable which will be connected (height of mounting stand >500 mm)
8.15.5.5 The legs/columns of mounting frame shall comes with the baseplate to mount on the civil foundation with anchor fasteners
8.15.5.6 Mounting Stand shall be supplied with pre-mounted/fixed stand/platform to access while operation when the height of LT Panel is going beyond the height of human (i.e. 1800 mm).
8.15.6 Painting
8.15.6.1 All metal part in the LT Panel shall be powder coated by following 7 tank process.
8.15.6.2 Required colour for the LT Panel (external surface) and its related accessories is RAL-9016 with structural finish
8.15.6.3 Additional mounting stand (i.e., Fabricated) shall be a painted in Black colour, minimum 2 coat shall be done
8.15.6.4 Care to be taken while shifting/transport to avoid scratches on the painted surface.
8.15.7 Metering Compartment
8.15.7.1 All the control equipment and meters to be placed in this compartment which is completely isolated between the switchgears
8.15.7.2 There should be a sperate arrangement for the routing of control cable to this compartment from its origin points on other parts of LT Panel
8.15.7.3 All kind of indication lamps, meters and other control relays to be mounted, the door shall have the require provision during fabrication stage at least before powder coating
8.15.7.4 Due to the "n" number of mounting accessories on door might lead an issue with sagging while operation hence, the door shall be provided with pre-fitted stiffeners by using welding joints
8.15.7.5 All the wires which will be routed on backside of door to be dressing well and enclosed with the covered tray.
8.15.7.6 Routing of communication cable from meter & ELR (if any) to be routed on the separate arrangement to avoid interference with induced magnetic flex
8.15.7.7 Minimum two hinges shall be fixed with the door of metring compartment to make sure proper operation/functioning
8.15.8 Incoming Cable Termination Area
8.15.8.1 The incoming MCCB shall be connected with the bus bar (25 mm x *Thk). And the arrangement which will be required on those bus bar area are defined below, Note:- It is not limited to the listed.
8.15.8.2 All the bus bar size to be selected as per the guidelines provided specification on the bus bar section i.e. "8.15.9"
8.15.8.3 The clearance between the poles of switchgear shall be followed at the time of fixing the bus bars with switchgear, the necessary action to be taken while fabricating the same.
8.15.8.4 Recommended to use single and double insulator arrangement to ensure proper clearance between poles (** Refer the GA provided by BECIS)
8.15.8.5 Holes which will be provided on the end of the bus bar to connect with cable shall be done as suitable for the ring terminal which will be used on the cable end.
8.15.8.6 The ends of bus bar shall be prepared in form of finger (i.e., zig zag) arrangement which will help to improve clearance between poles as well space availability while connecting cable with ring terminals
8.15.8.7 The gland plate shall be designed as per the project requirement
8.15.8.8 The shall be a support on the side wall of LT Panel to dress the cable inside the cubicle.
8.15.9 Outgoing Cable Termination Area
It is always recommended to provide the outgoing cable termination are on backside of outgoing breaker with rear access as it will help to have proper access while PM activities. Apart from,
8.15.9.1
1). In case of space constraints, it can be accumulated In a separate compartment next to the outgoing breakers compartment (in LHS/RHS).
If the no of runs which will be connected with outgoing breaker is equal to "2 Runs" or lesser, the bottom area of outgoing breaker can be used as an outgoing cable termination area with providing a proper arrangement as defined
8.15.9.2
below in following sections.
Whatever, the outgoing cable can not be connected directly with breaker spreader links. Hence, a bus bar arrangement should be provided for termination of the outgoing cables on the LT Panel. It should be done by following the terms
8.15.9.3
mentioned below, which is not limited to the listed.
8.15.9.4 All the bus bar size to be selected as per the guidelines provided specification on the bus bar section i.e., "8.15.10"
8.15.9.5 The clearance between the poles of switchgear shall be followed at the time of fixing the bus bars with switchgear, the necessary action to be taken while fabricating the same.
8.15.9.6 Recommended to use single and double insulator arrangement to ensure proper clearance between poles (** Refer the GA provided by BECIS) for "1 Run" or "2 Run" cable termination.
8.15.9.7 Holes which will be provided on the end of the bus bar to connect with cable shall be done as suitable for the ring terminal which will be used on the cable end.
8.15.9.8 The ends of bus bar shall be prepared in form of finger (i.e., zig zag) arrangement which will help to improve clearance between poles as well space availability while connecting cable with ring terminals
8.15.9.9 The gland plate shall be designed as per the project requirement
8.15.9.10 The shall be a support on the side wall of LT Panel to dress the cable inside the cubicle.
Document No. IN-EN-MD-001
Page 19 of 37
Technical Specification Rev. 3_Q4-24

Date 28-Oct-24

General Requirements
8.15.10 Bus Bar & Its Compartment

Material of bus bar shall be aluminium until there is no specific communication as per project requirement. It is applicable for all location in the plant area. In all scenarios the busbar current capacity & grade shall be confirmed from
8.15.10.1
material supplier side..
The current density of selected Alu busbar shall be minimum "0.8 A/mm²".In case of Cu Busbar the current density shall be minimum "1.6A/mm²" as a minimum. The bus bar shall be selected by considering the temperature while it is
8.15.10.2
functioning with full rating and installed on completely exposed area. Which means it should be designed to perform in 95 Deg C.
8.15.10.3 Always the size of bus bar shall be selected by considering, continuous current rating with heat offset factor .i.e. "1.25 full load current " as a basic.
8.15.10.4 The following terms are applicable to the LT panel and its relevant accessories were the aluminium bus bar will be used which to be followed without deviating.
8.15.10.5 All the breakers and isolators which will be used in the plant area shall be provided with the bus bar for cable termination as the direct termination on the spreader link and terminals of switchgear are not allowed.
8.15.10.6 As per the above mentioned factor the bus bar shall be selected with additional buffer
Additionally, the width of ring terminal of with respect to the cable size, and width of spreader links shall be considered while selecting as these might lead an issue at later stage.
8.15.10.7
Please Note: - Always Long barrel Ring Terminals shall be considered for any kind of cable termination, it is applicable at all location including LT Panel & its relevant accessories.
8.15.10.8 Conduction area (Sq.mm) which will comes under contact of each other on joints or any other connection shall be fulfilled or matched with continuous current rating.
Holes which will be provided on the end of the bus bar to connect with cable shall be done as suitable for the ring terminal which will be used on the cable end. There shall be minimum 70mm-90mm distance between 2 holes
8.15.10.9 to allow clearance between lug barrels in case of multiple runs of cable connected to same busbar. The tightening torque value will be depending upon the width of busbar & diameter of threaded bolt.e.g.50mm width busbar
& 12mm hardware ,Tightening torque value between 45Nm to 50Nm.Too high or too low tightening torque will result in errors & faults hence it is important to follow the correct approach. Panel Builder or Busbar OEM
guidelines to be followed here.
8.15.10.10 Holes which will be provided on other end where the it will be connected with switchgear shall be selected as suitable for the fasteners
8.15.10.11 There should not be any airgap on the connection area as it can lead an issue with derating as well temperature raise.
The bus bar which will be used in the LT panel to combine the all incoming together should be selected properly. By considering continuous current rating on its full load capacity and other utility loads rating (if any). And it
8.15.10.12
shall be called as main bus bar on the LT Panel.
8.15.10.13 The main bus bar on the LT panel shall be placed in a separate vertical compartment in LHS/RHS of outgoing breakers compartment as per project requirement
8.15.10.14 The size of these compartments shall be designed as per the requirement to the bus bar size which will be installed as per suitable capacity
8.15.10.15 Minimum width of these compartments shall be 400 mm, by considering the surrounding space 4 sides to ensure proper air ventilation on this compartment
8.15.10.16 A removable cover with bolt arrangement shall be provided of these compartment Additional it should have a louvers with wire mesh.
8.15.10.17 These compartments should be covered with the external door in case if the installation of LT panel will be done on outdoor or open location,
Regarding the ventilation arrangement, the cooling fan to be fixed on LHS and RHS side wall with filters, and the chilled air to be brought to the bus bar compartment by making an appreciable arrangement on the partitions
8.15.10.18
on the LT Panel. (Refer the GA and images of LT Panels shared by BECIS for better understanding)
8.15.10.19 The proper supporting arrangement shall be provided to the bus bar in even distance (i.e., 600 mm) to avoid the temperature raise.
As mentioned, these will be installed in vertical arrangement. Hence, the complete depth of LT panel should be utilized to ensure additional gap between bus bars. Also, it will help to improve the air circulation in these
8.15.10.20
compartments.

8.15.10.21 There should a air gap between the runs of bus bar on the same phase. Where the no of run is equal or greater than to "2 runs", The joints between the bus bars should be connected like "Sandwich" type arrangement.

When the no of runs is equal or greater than "2 Runs" it should be done on both side of terminal or equipment's to ensure maximum conduction area. For example 4 Runs of bus bar shall be connected with spreader link like "2
8.15.10.22 Run of bus bar + Spreader Link + 2 Runs of bus bar".
Please Note: - The same will be applicable to all the area in the electrical network of plant area.
8.15.10.23 All the bus bar shall have an individual identification with heat sleeves in exposed area, & cable termination area. The area apart from mentioned should have a naked bus bar to ensure air ventilation.
8.15.10.24 A 50 x 10 mm thk Earthing bus bar (naked with green colour identification on exposed area) shall be used in LT panel along the length, and it should bring out on both sides for connection with earthing grid.
8.15.10.25 It shall be provided on LT panel and all kind of electrical panels. The water sealing arrangement shall be used while bring out the bus bar from sides of LT panel.
8.15.11 Components & Switchgear
All kind of switchgear & major components which will be used in the solar plant will be covered in following section which is applicable from module end and power evacuation/integration point on the client's network
8.15.11.1 Switchgears & Its Basic Requirements
8.15.11.1.1 Every component on the system which will be used to disconnect and connect electrically must be having arrangement with to break/connect all poles together

These are the recommended switchgear type which to be implemented on electrical system whereas per project requirement.
1). DC Side shall be a 2 Pole or 3 Pole
8.15.11.1.2 2). AC Side, 3 Phase, 4 Wire shall be a 4 Pole
3). AC Side, 3 Phase, 3 Wire shall be a 3 Pole
4). AC Side, 1 Phase, 2 Wire shall be a 2 Pole, Earthing can be connected directly

8.15.11.1.3 All guidelines issued by the OEM should be followed properly, and the same taken on the account of consideration while designing
8.15.11.1.4 AC Side
a The following guidelines are applicable to the switchgear which will be used to control the AC network
b All poles of the AC network should be cut-down while operating i.e., Neutral and all phase to be disconnected/connected at same time
c Most of the scenario the 3 Phase, 4 wire system will be used in the plant area, hence the breaker which will be used there must be a 4 Pole switchgear.
d For the 1 Phase, 2 Wire system, neutral to be connected through the MCB instead of neutral link.
8.15.11.1.5 Incoming Breakers
a All the inverter shall have a independent breakers (i.e., MCCB) which will be mounted on the Solar LT Panel
Incoming breaker of each inverter shall be selected as suitable to the continuous current rating of inverters with heat offset of 1.25. Commercially available rating closer to( full load current of 3 hrs x1.25 )will be acceptable
b .The temperature correction shall apply for the current ratings' temperature as per sum of "ambient temperature +Temperature due to heat by conduction " will be considered.
However, the design/selection calculation of each input to be submitted along with Single line diagram (SLD) for BECIS design and review purpose
c All MCCBs/ACBs shall be only with an LS /LSI/ LSIG Trip unit as per BECIS design approval. Thermal magnetic trip unit based MCCB will not be used .
d The breaking capacity of the MCCB should be 36 kA, & Ics=Icu
e All these breakers should have a spreader links, and phase barriers which is supplied by OEM. These accessories should be additionally purchased and installed with breakers If it is not supplied with breakers.
f However, all the selection should be done as per the approved SLD shared by BECIS team during the project initiation.
g Additionally refer the below matrix of breaker type which are pre-approved by the BECIS, which is recommended to use on Solar LT Panel.
8.15.11.1.6 Outgoing Breaker
a The breaker which will be installed after combining all inverters together been called as an outgoing breaker.

Rating of these breakers shall be selected by considering continuous current rating of all inverters combining on LT Panel with heat offset of 1.25. Commercially available rating closer to( full load current of 3 hrs x1.25 )will
b be acceptable .The temperature correction shall apply for the current ratings.ACB /MCCB temperature as per sum of "ambient temperature +Temperature due to heat by conduction " will be considered. However the
design/selection calculation of these breakers to be submitted along with Single line diagram (SLD) for BECIS design and review purpose.
Apart from the rating, these breakers shall have an appreciable arrangement to handle the fault condition i.e., LSIG Trip unit and rated breaking capacity. The minimum breaking capacity of these breakers should be >=50 kA
c
& Ics=Icu.
It is recommended to use Air circuit breaker above 1000A rating for every first breaker in circuit. If there happens to be more than 1 circuit breaker then BECIS design team can consider MCCB there.
d
Refer the below matrix of breaker type which are pre-approved by the BECIS, which is recommended to use on Solar LT Panel.

e Solar injection circuit breaker configuration will depend upon Off taker side system i.e.3P+N,4P (Exception BECIS owned panels)

f However, all the selection should be done as per an approved SLD shared by BECIS team during the project initiation.
8.15.11.1.7 Isolators (After Inverter)
a The LT Panel shall be designed in such a way to keep minimum distance between the inverters which will be combined together in it.

An Isolation MCCB (4 Pole) should be used as breaking unit near the inverter when the distance between the Inverter and LT Panel is more than 100 Meters and not in eyesight level/Across road between 2 roofs/ or practical
b
difficulties in shutdown/line permit/lock out tag out/remote or local control.

c The isolator to be placed in the IP54 Housing with proper canopy arrangement to resisting the sunlight as well rain water. Ventilation purpose punched louver set must be provided for all Isolator panels.
d All the isolators shall be fixed on the mounting plate in the unit & the extended rotary handle to be used for better function
Isolators of each inverter shall be selected as suitable to the continuous current rating of inverters with heat offset of 1.25. Commercially available rating closer to( full load current of 3 hrs x1.25 )will be acceptable .The
e
temperature correction shall apply for the current ratings. MCCB temperature as per sum of "ambient temperature +Temperature due to heat by conduction " will be considered.
f As defined it should a 4 Pole type, it should be supplied with spreader link and phase barriers (refer the breaker matrix for pre-approved OEM of isolators & its series/family)
Direct cable termination with the isolator will not be allowed except where circular flexible cables are used.
g
In case of general compacted sector cables ; both sides of isolator shall be extended with a bus bar where the cable will be terminated.

Rating of bus bar shall be selected as per continuous current rating of inverters with heat offset of 1.25. Commercially available busbars matching rating closer to( full load current of 3 hrs x1.25 )will be acceptable . (factor
h
0.8 Amps/mm² for Alu & 1.6A/mm² for Cu),Busbar width & thickness will be as per specific requirement e.g. Breaker bus/Off taker bus requirement etc.
i Clearance between poles shall be maintained as defined above (i.s., 25 mm minimum). Bus bar arrangement and cable termination provision shall be design as suitable to the same.
Document No. IN-EN-MD-001
Page 20 of 37
Technical Specification Rev. 3_Q4-24

Date 28-Oct-24

General Requirements
Breaker Matrix: Default MCCB & ACB make shall be L& T which is suitable for challenging weather conditions & industries like chemical sugar etc.
8.15.11.1.8
In case Off taker asks for another option & Indoor location then other models shall be considered.

Sr. No OEM Category Pre-Approved Series/Family

Incoming Breaker NA
1 ABB NA
Outgoing Breaker
ACB - Emax - E1, E2, 2.2 E4 & E6, >=50 kA, EDO Type with LSIG & Shunt Trip Coil
NA
2 Schneider Electric Outgoing Breaker NA
ACB - Easy Pact MVS, >=50 kA, EDO Type with LSIG (ET6G) & Shunt Trip Coil
Incoming Breaker NA
3 Siemens NA
Outgoing Breaker
ACB - 3WT, >=50 kA, EDO Type with LSIG (ETU37WT)

MCCB 160A,250A,400A ,Breaking capacity 36kA /50kA LSIG trip unit ,spreader link ,terminal shroud, phase barriers, Auxiliary
Incoming Breaker
contact, shunt trip coil
4 L&T
Outgoing Breaker MCCB 630A,800A,.Fixed ACB 1250A,1600A as outgoing breaker with shunt trip coil except final breaker before injection.
Outgoing Breaker ACB EDO/MDO as per BECIS approval 50kA or higher ,with LSIG trip unit & shunt trip coil for final breaker before injection.
4 L&T Isolator (After Inverter) Isolator, 4 Pole MCCB with STC 36kA or more
8.15.11.1.9 The technical data sheet, temperature co-efficient curves documents of particular selected model to be submitted for review and approval purpose
8.15.11.1.10 Additional Requirement on Breaker Selection

a Below-mentioned requirements are must be followed without fail since these are directly linked with the unit's reliability and functioning, and it should be considered from initial designing stage to avoid inconvenience at later stage.

All the breakers, including an isolator, which to be installed in the panel by using the mounting clamps or plate In manner to provide gap/clearance behind the breaker. As the air circulation on all 4 sides of breakers are required for its
b
better functioning of breaker.
c All outgoing breaker shall and main injection breaker (will be owned by BECIS) shall have a provision to fix the LOTO to use while maintenance activity
By considering operational challenges and EHS Safety guideline. Upstream breakers on plant's electrical network should be a draw-out type. It requires for ensuring double isolation from source/live parts while doing maintenance
d
activities on down-stream breaker installed in same electrical network of plant.
However, last breaker of each power evacuation/injection point which will be owned by BECIS should be a Electrically/Manually draw-out type, & It should have Arrangement/capability to operate from remote (i.e., To TRIP & ON).
e
It is required by considering the future maintenance activities in the plant, electrical equipment's and LT Panel .This is subjected to approval by BECIS engineering.
For the remote operation of electrically draw-out type breaker refer the wiring/control circuit shared by the BECIS.
f
Please Note: - The "Trip" signal from RPR and other accessories (if any) need to be connected with this breaker as these breakers will have "auto" close function also it can be triggered from remotely.
The MCCB/ACB which will be tripped with RPR trip signal shall have an arrangement to give signals to the SCADA Unit to get to know the status of breaker i.e., ON/OFF/TRIP contacts should be extended / connected with SCADA
g
unit through an appreciable arrangement. (Collect details from BECIS).
8.15.11.1.11 Mounting Arrangement of Incoming Breaker
a As mentioned above in section "8.15.4.7" all switchgear which will be used on the LT panel shall be housing in the compartments, the complete design of the unit shall designed in such a way
Additionally, the following requirement to be considered which are the minimum requirement which to be fulfilled on the incomer feeder level
b
(** Applicable for each compartment where 1+ incoming are going to be combined)
c All the switchgear to be fixed in the compartment as per OEM guidelines.
d The clearance between MCCB and backside wall by providing mounting plate/frame to ensure the proper circulation on all 4 sides of switchgear :applicable for isolator as well)
The clearance between for following area to be maintained as defined here, the fixing arrangement shall be planned and executed by considering the same
1). Phase to Phase - Minimum 25 mm
e
2). Phase to Neutral - Minimum 25 mm
3). Phase/Neutral to Earth - Minimum 40 mm
f All breaker (i.e., MCCB) which will be used connected in the LT Panel must be supplied with Spreader link and Phase barriers
g The electrical creepage and clearance distance as per OEM shall be followed
h All the termination/connection with the incoming breaker shall be done with bus bar only, using cable (direct termination) must be avoided.
i The bus bar which will be used in the LT Panel should fulfil the minimum requirement as mentioned in following section "8.15.10"
j All the breakers should have a external rotary handle with proper arrangement which to be fixed on internal door as per OEM
Regarding the control accessories, each compartment shall be provided with ON indication (in Red colour) to know the status of incomer status (i.e., No Need to provide glass window for these indication in case if external doors will
k
be provided)
l The indication circuit of incoming MCCB to be connected with main control circuit & routed through the RCCB (30 mA)
m These compartments shall have enough air ventilation arrangement to avoid heating issue in that feeder.
n All the live connection in the feeder including branch bus bar to be covered with an acrylic sheet to avoid accidental touch while operation. Enough/required arrangement t be fixed while design as well at time of fabrication
o A warning sticker to be placed on the acrylic sheet which will be used to cover the live connection
8.15.12 Control Circuit
8.15.12.1 The specification of all the switchgear which will be used on controlling and metering unit will be covered under this section
8.15.12.2 RCCB (30 mA) shall be used as a master/main switching unit for control circuit i.e., all control and utilities supply shall be routed though it, apart from one utility Sockets which will be used to connect UPS & SCADA Unit
8.15.12.3 Tapping of control signal shall be connected on "Grid" side of Solar LT Panel which is all time available source.
8.15.12.4 Each control circuit in the panel shall be a proper controlling switch i.e., 2 Pole MCB, direct neutral link to be avoided
8.15.12.5 Suitable conductors shall be used for wiring of utilities and should be dressed well in a covered PVC tray & wrapping spirals
8.15.13 Indication Circuit
8.15.13.1 An aesthetically pleasing design "230 VAC LED indication lamp" in mentioned colour shall be used on LT Panel
8.15.13.2 All the indication lamp which will be installed on the outgoing breaker cable should be visible from glass window in external door as mentioned above.
8.15.13.3 Following are the minimum required indication w.r.t its functioning
Outgoing Section Other Utilities - If applicable
Incoming Section
(Should be visible from glass window) (Should be visible from glass window)
ON Indication in Red Colour Trip from RPR in Amber ON Indication in Red colour
OFF Indication in Green Colour ELR & Control Relay Trip in Amber
TRIP Indication in Amber Colour Trip from Remote in Amber
ACB In Test
ACB in Service
Ready to Close (require for ACB)
8.15.14 Metering Circuit
This section shall holds require specification on the metering circuit & its components which includes Current transformer, Potential transformer, meters and wires which will used for wiring
8.15.14.1 Meters
8.15.14.1.1 For Billing/Revenue/Tariff meters to be provided in 2 units as "main & check meter (0.2s class)". These meters should be a Multi Function Meters (MFM) with high accuracy, configurability and easy integration
8.15.14.1.2 It should come with, easy interface arrangement with external devices (i.e., SCADA Unit of BASIS) through built-in Modbus communication via RS-485 port / ethernet
8.15.14.1.3 It should have a detachable connector for easy installation, diagnostics assistance on display, and password protection for setup mode
8.15.14.1.4 Preferred location is on the Solar LT panel which will be placed near to inverter station. As per the project location it can be re-located
8.15.14.1.5 Accuracy class of these meters should be 0.2S. It should comply with all mentioned standards (IS13779, IS14697, IEC62052-11, IEC62053-21, IEC62053-23, IEC62053-22, IEC61010, IEC62053-31)
8.15.14.1.6 Each meters should have a individual instrument transformers (refer the following section for its specification)
8.15.14.1.7 These are the following data which should be available on the display as well over Modbus communication via RS-485 port / Ethernet
a. Line Voltage, Current, Power of All phase e. Active power, Reactive power, & Apparent power
b. Power factor f. Apparent import/export energy
c. Average power factor
d. All kind of Power - Active power, Reactive power, Apparent power
e. Active total import/export energy
8.15.14.1.8 Please Note: - The auxiliary supply & voltage reference of the meters should be connected on "Grid Side" of Solar LT Panel as it is a all time available source.
Document No. IN-EN-MD-001
Page 21 of 37
Technical Specification Rev. 3_Q4-24

Date 28-Oct-24

General Requirements
8.15.14.2 Instrument Transformer

8.15.14.2.1 Current Transformer (CT)

a All current transformers (CT) which will be used in the LT panel for Billing/Revenue/Tariff meters must be a completely encapsulated cast resin insulated window type
b CT shall be designed as suitable for continuous operation at the ambient temperature prevailing inside the LT Panel when it is operating at its rated load. The class of insulation should be E or better.
c The accuracy class for Current transformer which will be connected with Billing/Revenue/Tariff meters should be a "0.2S class".
d All current transformer shall have clear indelible polarity markings. All secondary terminals should be wired to separate terminals on an accessible terminal block
e The CT shall have fixing arrangement the weight of unit should be transferred to the main structure of LT panel instead of bus bar. Necessary arrangement shall be done during design of LT panel & its relevant unit.
As mentioned for Billing/Revenue/Tariff meters to be provided in 2 units of meters i.e., "main & check meter (0.2s class)" will be used both meters should have a separate set of CT. The burden of each Current transformers should be
f
minimum 10VA.
g Wiring between the CT and meter should be done by using 2.5 Sq.mm, PVC insulated FRLS wires in manner to reduce the burden.
h All the CT's must be connected with the meters and other equipment by using the "CT disconnecting terminals"
i The Current transformer (CT) which will be used for other function & purpose i.e., RPR, Ref., metering could be a "Nylon case" and "Class 1 - Accuracy". However, other terms will be applicable for those
8.15.14.2.2 Voltage Transformer (PT)
Voltage transformer shall be used for voltage inputs to the meters of Billing/Revenue/Tariff and other control relays (i.e., RPR), it must be a completely encapsulated cast resin insulated type, suitable for continuous operation at the
a
ambient temperature prevailing inside the LT Panel when it is operating at its rated load. The class of insulation should be E or better.
b Voltage transformer connecting with Billing/Revenue/Tariff meters should be "0.5 class, 10 VA" for metering purpose. For protection purpose it shall be used as per the project requirement.
c It shall have clear indelible polarity markings. All secondary terminals should be wired to separate terminals on an accessible terminal block.
d HRC fuses shall be installed on high voltage side (i.e., Primary) of the voltage transformer for protection
e Rated fuses shall be used on it Low Voltage side (i.e., Secondary) of the voltage transformer for protection along with Rated rating of MCB.
f Wiring between the PT's secondary terminal and meters shall be done via Fuse, MCB and test terminals which to be wired by using 2.5 Sq.mm PVC FRLS wires.
g Voltage input for the meters and other control relay shall be connected through suitable rated McBay which can be triggered while require.
8.15.14.2.3 Core-Balanced Current Transformer
a Core-Balanced Current Transformer to be used in case if applicable as per the approved schemes and approved drawing by BECIS
As mentioned earlier the it must be a completely encapsulated cast resin insulated type, suitable for continuous operation at the ambient temperature prevailing inside the LT Panel when it is operating at its rated load. The class of
b
insulation should be E or better
c All runs of outgoing cable shall be routed through Cacti hence, the size (i.e., inner dia) shall be selected by considering no of runs and its size
d Properly synchronized CBCT & ELR shall be used/fixed on the panel to avoid inconvenience at later stage
e It is recommended to use the shield cable for the signal to ELR from CBCT and should be routed in separate routing to avoid interference as it will lead to unwanted tripping
8.15.15 Control Relay
8.15.15.1 The control relay shall be used for the protection purpose according to the scheme and project requirement. These are the minimum requirement which to be fulfilled & considered while selecting the relay & its unit
8.15.15.2 All the relay shall be a flush mounted (i.e., mountable on compartments door) with easy access to the terminal blocks fixed on the relay & its control unit
8.15.15.3 All control wires which will be used shall be dressed in a proper manner with good aesthetic arrangement
8.15.15.4 Operating voltage of relay and it unit should be 230 VAC or 24 VDC or form easily available source
8.15.16 Surge Protection Device
8.15.16.1 Solar LT Panel should have the sufficient/recommend protection equipment for Inverter protections as per Inverter OEM datasheet (if any).
8.15.16.2 "SPD type I+II+III" Shall be connected on main breaker output and in the Solar LT Panel, the SPD should be the DIN rail mounted type and the SPD along with remote fault indicator to be used.
8.15.16.3 The Panel where the UPS, Sensor and converters are not connected shall be equipped with "Type I+II"
8.15.16.4 The rating of SPD shall be: In = 50 kA, Imp = 12.5 kA. It should comply the relevant standards i.e., EN 61643-11, IEC 61643-11 and UL1449 ed.5 compliance
8.15.16.5 A 32 Amps, 4 Pole McBay shall be used on incoming of SPD.
8.15.16.6 All the wiring on SPD which will be done by using 16 Sq.mm Cu, Multi Strands, PVC insulated Flexible cable.
8.15.16.7 The Earthing of SPD should be done as per the OEM. Also, the routing of SPD cables and its earthing cable should be routed separately to avoid interference with other sensitive equipment's used in the Solar LT panel
8.15.16.8 The Earthing cable of SPD to be brought till/close to the gland plate, and a separate terminal blocks to be provided to connected with earthing grid by using the cables.
8.15.17 Cable Glands
8.15.17.1 All Cable (except Communication cable) should be terminated using double compression type cable glands brass with nickel (SS) coating and rust free material.
Cable glands shall conform to BS: 6121 and be of robust construction capable of clamping cable and cable Armor (for armoured cables) firmly without injury to insulation, The glands should be earthed at two locations by using
8.15.17.2
earthing tag.
8.15.17.3 All the glands should be IP 66 as per IS 12063, Sealing Rubber Ring - Nitrile / Neoprene.
8.15.17.4 An exact size of gland should be used on all kind of cable which will be connected to the Solar LT Panel. Oversized gland should be avoided.
8.15.18 Current Status Interfacing with Online

Online interface needs to be done for the following components in the LT Panel or in the Plant area by using an appreciable arrangement as per BECIS

1. Main Breaker (ACB/MCCB) at the LT Panel/Solar LT Panel/Combiner Panel - ON, OFF and Trip Status Should be availed
2. Status of SPD - at Solar LT Panel - Faulty/Healthy Status should be availed.
8.15.18.1 3. Status of ELR (If applicable)
4. Status of RPR - EB and DG
5. Actual Temperature Reading of followings - Breaker Body, Temperature on the Outgoing Cable Termination Points.
6. Internal Temperature of LT Panel
7. Status of UPS
Drawing for the status integration and temperature measurement should be submitted (along with LT Panel technical specification) during detailed engineering for the review/approval purpose, For the status interfacing, Interface C/O
8.15.18.2
Relay can be used as per the requirement and as per the approved drawing.
8.15.18.3 RTD Based Temperature sensor should be used for the interface of temperature and the details & make of the sensor will be shared during detailed engineering
All the status of the listed equipment can be taken by using the Interface C/O Relay as per the needs, and the potential free signal can be connected with SCADA System by adding the converter to convert the signal as required to the
8.15.18.4
our SCADA System, the drawing shall be submitted by the EPC, the approval and comments will be shared by BECIS, based on the same the material have to be purchased and installed at site.
8.15.18.5 All necessary wiring to be done on the panel before sending the LT Panel/LT Panel to site, to avoid error on wiring in later stage.
8.15.19 UPS Cubical in Solar LT Panel

8.15.19.1 A independent UPS cubical shall be provided for to accommodate the UPS in the LT Panel. (It is not applicable for the project where UPS is provided for handling control Aux power requirement, as per following specifications)

8.15.19.2 An UPS which will be suitable to provide the back-up for "3 Hrs" shall be supplied by the vendor along with LT panel or in a separate arrangement. Refer the attached BOM for the approved model and series of UPS.
8.15.19.3 The Power supply to the UPS must be connected from "Grid side in the LT Panel which is all time available source

8.15.19.4 As mentioned above for "UPS Status" monitoring purpose a potential free contactor shall be connected on incoming source of UPS and the same to be connected with SCADA unit by using proper arrangement as per BECIS.

8.15.19.5 Air ventilation to the UPS cubical is must, the placement of cubical shall be placed by considering air ventilation.
It is recommended to keep all status monitoring accessories and its related items like SMPS, Converter, Relays to be placed in these compartments as the routing with RS 485 cable will be easier when all the things placed at single
8.15.19.6
location.

8.15.20 Automatic Fire Suppression System for Electrical Panels

8.15.20.1 Clean agent based Automatic fire suppression system to restrict fire propagation shall be considered in design stage in consultation with BECIS engineering team.

8.15.20.2 For systems under 400 kW, the scale and quantity of equipment will be smaller. Therefore, all electrical panels for systems below 400 kW should be equipped with a portable cylinder containing a clean agent system.
An Automatic Fire Suppression System (AFSS) for the electrical panel, which will be considered part of BECIS assets, must be provided. The criteria for provision include systems above 400 kW or those used in industrial premises,
8.15.20.3
shop floors, or warehouses.
8.15.20.4 The AFSS system should be supplied by a certified vendor familiar with fire suppression solutions in industrial settings.

8.15.20.5 All components used in this system should be from familiar, widely available OEMs to ensure availability for replacements in case of damage, issues, errors, or malfunctions.

8.15.20.6 The required cut-outs for the ACDB and other electrical panels should be made during fabrication in proper coordination with both vendors.

The fire detection tube must be laid around the switchgear, joints, cable termination areas, or any other locations where a fire could potentially start and cause significant damage. The tube’s temperature rating should meet industrial
8.15.20.7
standards.
8.15.20.8 The system should have no leaks, and all joints must be verified during commissioning.

8.15.20.9 The AFSS system should include the materials listed in the typical BOM provided but is not limited to those mentioned.

1. As per Volume of the cubicle we select the container capacity 2kG ,5kG,10kG of Novec 1230,FK5-1-12

2. Direct low pressure cylinder complete with valve, pressure switch

3. Linear pneumatic heat detection tube with fittings

4. End of line Plug/Adaptor

Document No. IN-EN-MD-001
Page 22 of 37
Technical Specification Rev. 3_Q4-24

Date 28-Oct-24

General Requirements 5. Master control panel for Audio/Visual alarm.

6. Electrical fittings ,accessories ,hardware

8.15.20 Require Documents

8.15.20.1 For the approval and review purpose of Solar LT Panel and its related accessories a technical specification with GA shall be submitted with BECIS.
8.15.20.2 Following details shall be provided on the technical specification
a Details of breakers and incoming and outgoing side
b Details of cable (Size and No. of Core)
c Panel fabrication details (Material, Ingress protection ratings and surface coating details)
d Bus-bar and arrangement details
e Other components and its technical information
f Arrangement for installation
g Outdoor /Indoor type, Degree of protection
h Wiring Details of Combiner Box
i General arrangement of panel and equipment’s along with its installation arrangements
8.15.20.3 Along with technical specification these follows documents will be require
a Panel GA & fabrication details (Material, Ingress protection ratings and surface coating details)
b Certificate for Ingress protection rating of the Panel & all the applicable equipment's.
c Detail BOM of the Panel along with make
d Combiner Panel SLD & Wiring Interconnection Diagram
e CT, Bus bar selection documents
Calculations of short time current ratings after considering impedances & fault feeding capacities at all the interconnection points. Calculated short circuit currents should be mentioned in SLD also should be submitted
f
along SLD.
g Off taker side SLD with LT Panel integration
h Switchgear Selection Basis along with tripping curves
i Detail Technical Datasheet & GTP for all Breakers, Meter's, Busbar, RPR, SPD, ELR With CBCT and Current Transformer
j Data Sheets of other BOS in the Solar LT Panel and its related accessories

8.16 Power Evacuation System

8.16.1 Power Evacuation system should be done as per the approved schematic by the owner (BECIS) and end user.
Generally a direct connection with the end-user busbar should be avoided, a µP based 4 Pole MCCB/ACB with LSIG Trip unit and a 4 Pole Isolator should be used before the power injection point with end user grid connection point. Anyhow, the
approval from the owner (BECIS) and End user shall be required before finalizing the injection schematic. As per the comments on that further can be proceeded.
8.16.2
* Refer the Breaker matrix in Section "8.15.11.1.8" for selection of Pre-Approved OEM & its Series Family of breakers
** W.r.t. the current rating we need to use ACB
*** w.r.t to arrangement of electrical network type of breaker to be changed refer section _________
As mentioned above, the Billing meter (2 Units) as Main and check meter should be used fixed on the LT Panel near to the Inverter Station, All the terms mentioned on section "8.15.13" for CT, PT and Meters to be fulfilled if it is require on Power
8.16.3
evacuation point as per end-user requirement/project requirement
8.17 Net Metering (If applicable)
8.17.1 The guidelines by the local electricity distribution board needs to be followed in this case, necessary equipment as per the standards as well as per recommendation by the EB need to be followed.
Generation meter or net meter panel installed under net metering provision should be earthed to the existing earthing grid available nearby using 50x6mm earthing flats.
8.17.2 1. Outdoor type with bidirectional meter, MCCB, CT & PT 0.2S (with one spare core) as per utility standards, CEIG and approval by the Owner.
2. Meter calibration by gov approved agency. Main meter and check meter.

8.18 System Monitoring

The real time trend, SCADA shall also have provision for offline viewing and retrieving of historical daily, monthly and yearly averaged value of all above parameters. SCADA shall store the daily energy produced by the plant, monthly energy and the
8.18.1
annual energy. Further SCADA shall also display the Performance Ratio (PR) of the plant. All the trend and cumulative graphs should be able to view and stored with time and date stamped.
SCADA shall provide 15 minute interval daily, monthly and annual average of following parameters
8.18.2 1. Exported Energy
2. Energy of each inverter
The SCADA shall have the feature to be integrated with the Network system as well as remotely via the web using either a standard modem or a GSM/WIFI modem. The contractor shall provide compatible software and hardware so that data can be
8.18.3
transmitted via standard modem.
8.18.4 Remote monitoring units should be installed in the plant for monitoring the plant performance.
Micro PLC + HMI Unit should be installed at site as pet the approved drawing and layout, If plant should be installed on more than one building / roof, additional unit’s should be required, the approval from the owner should be taken by submitting the
8.18.5
layout and required data as listed in the drawing details,
Each unit (if more than one unit) should have required H/w and Web enabled with Internet connection to record and Display the String level data from PCU’s, Weather related inputs form the sensors, Meter’s output signals form the AC Combiner
8.18.6
Panel, AC Combiner Panel, PR, graphs, screens, also download options, configuration (if required) form remote monitoring system for all recorded data.
The power supply for the SCADA Box / System (incl., other accessories) shall be provided from Uninterruptible Power Source (i.e. UPS), The rating of UPS shall be greater than 700 VA, it will be required for each SCADA Box. The same will be
8.18.7
applicable for the case, if the source is already provided from the client's internal UPS system, by considering additional back-up.
Meter’s should be installed in all DG sync panel which is related with the power injection from PV Plant, those meters should be connected with the remote monitoring unit, the curtailed unit’s of DG should be recorded in SCADA. Curtailment
8.18.8
philosophy & calculation to be signed off with customer
Modbus TCP Server, Mounting structure of all components on communication system, arranging/extending auxiliary supply to the system accessories, earthing of SCADA & WMS components also will be in scope of contractors.
8.18.9
All these above requirements shall be done by following or as instructed by OEM or BECIS Project, Design & Quality Team.
8.18.10 The following equipment’s should be connected with remote monitoring unit, Required cable (RS 485) should be laid and that to be connected with the data logger.
PV Inverters (Central/String)
Meter in AC Combiner panel - Main and Check Meters, Status Monitoring arrangements if any
Meter at Injection point (Main and Check meter)
Meters in DG Synch Panel
Meters in EB Incomers (if applicable)
Sensors –Complete weather monitoring station system with Pyranometer, Module temperature sensor, Ambient temperature sensor,
** Complete WMS with above components will be considered for ground mounted projects along with Anemometer, Wind vane, Rain Gauge, soiling loss sensor.
Current Status of Breaker Operation - (MCCB/ACB at the AC Combiner Panel)
Status of SPD at the AC Combiner Panel
Temperature Sensors at The AC Combiner Panel
DG and EB RPR's,
Status of RPR and ELR (If applicable), the Potential free Contacts can be added along with the breaker details
String Monitoring Box
8.18.11 Approval should be required from the end user to monitoring EB and DG Sources of the plant.

8.19 Weather Monitoring System

The following sensor to be provided along with the accessories which will be used to communicate with the SCADA System. All these sensors shall have a "RS 485 Modu-Bus Output" which can be directly communicated with our SCADA Unit
without using Converters and arrangement.

8.19.1
1. Pyranometers - Make Kipp & Zonen, SMP 3, Class 2
2. Ambient temperature sensor
3. Module temperature sensor
The Pyranometer to be installed close to the SCADA Box, as using additional cable between the SCADA Box and the sensor to be avoided, if required then Junction box (IP 65) has to be installed close to the sensor to provide the power supply and get
8.19.2
the signal reference from it.
1 Nos per site below 1000 kW, above 1000 kW 2 Nos. SMP 3 or better Pyranometer to be provided, and 1 Nos of module Temperature sensor for each evacuation point, Single ambient temperature sensor should be provided to record the weather
8.19.3
information.
UPS power supply for sensors & datalogger (e.g.12V/24V/30V DC as per OEM datasheet or manual )to be provided using MCB+RCCB+Type 3 SPD . These arrangement shall be done as per BECIS and getting formal approval from design team
8.19.4
before proceeding further.
Document No. IN-EN-MD-001
Page 23 of 37
Technical Specification Rev. 3_Q4-24

Date 28-Oct-24

General
8.20 Requirements
Protection from Reverse Power Towards DG's and Grid (if applicable)
8.20.1 Synchronization with Diesel Generator
8.20.1.1 All the "Diesel Generator Set" which can feed or connected with the common bus where the solar power injection need to be synchronized properly by using a proper algorithm.
8.20.1.2 Additional as a back-up protection a "Reverse Power Protection Relay to be installed on each incoming from "Diesel Generators".
The trip signal from these protection relay must be wired to the injection breaker or the breaker which is installed on the Solar LT Panel or the breaker which will have a provision to trigger from remotely as mentioned above in section
8.20.1.3
"8.15.11.1.10 - e ".
8.20.1.4 To complete both process "EB/DG Power Controller (RPR)" shall be used, get details of relay and BOM its accessories which to be fixed with these protection relay unit.
The following shall be given as a input signal to these protection relay. The detailing of the requirement will be mentioned on the BOM.

8.20.1.5 1). Current Input from all 3 Phases (i.e., L1, L2, and L3)
2). Voltage Input from all 3 Phases
3). Power Supply for the Unit

8.20.1.6 All the Voltage reference and current reference to the EB/DG Power Controller need to be connected through an appreciable controlling arrangement i.e., MCB & CT Links which can be operated while testing need to be done.

8.20.1.7 It is recommended to use a Electromechanical relay between the internal relay of RPR and Tripping circuit of Solar Power System as it will help used to act as an isolation as well contact multiplication can be done.
8.20.1.8 As mentioned above, all 3 phases current reference should be connected to this unit for the it is recommended to use a "Nylon Case Current transformer (CT)".
8.20.1.9 The CT shall be selected as suitable to the rating of equipment's, space availability at the location and bus bar size where the CT will be installed.
8.20.1.10 It is recommended to use a New set of CT's always as the existing CT might be installed with lesser burden and Permission from end-user might be denied.
8.20.1.11 The same will be applicable to the fixing arrangement of "EB/DG Power Controller (RPR)".
8.20.1.12 It is always recommended to keep with minimum distance between CT and controller to avoid burden on CT, hence always recommended to mount/fix the relay on the compartment doors of DG.
A separate enclosure (IP 65, RAL 9016) shall be provided and fixed near to the DG's feeder if In case if there is no space to mount/fix the controller on the feeder itself. Also, it suggested to keep close to the feeder else the burden of
8.20.1.13
CT need to be increased to avoid loading on it.
8.20.1.14 All the control units, EB/DG Power Controller & relay unit shall be fixed on the enclosure with proper wiring arrangements
8.20.1.15 Routing of CT & Voltage reference cable shall be routed by using an "Armed Cable" or "Flexible wires by routed in the properly sealed & Fixed conduits.
8.20.1.16 These devices i.e., EB/DG Power Controllers are capable to communicate with SCADA unit over RS 485 Mod-Bus communication hence, the same to be added with communication network of the plant area.
8.20.1.17 All the controlling of Solar Power plant will be done through the communication only hence it shall be done with additional care and properly.
8.20.1.18 The above-mentioned terms are applicable to the selection of RS 485 Cable it to be fulfilled as well installation of the same.
8.20.1.19 While using the existing CT for our purpose a proper approval shall be taken before proceeding further and additional care shall be taken while wiring and commissioning the unit.
Above-mentioned terms are applicable for an individual DG incomers, when there are multiple inputs are connected to the common bus the same need to be implemented there without missing out and deviating from mentioned terms
8.20.1.20
for all incomers from various DG's.
8.20.1.21 While multiple Power controller device installed at single location or nearby location, it can be clubbed together for getting a common "TRIP" signal to trigger the solar plant under fault condition.
8.20.1.22 Get the wiring diagram of the Power Controller along with BOM and details which will give more clarity on the same.
8.20.2 Synchronization with Local Electricity Board (Grid)
8.20.2.1 It is recommended to keep installing all Synchronization accessories and control unit on first incomer in the plant to have a proper utilization of generated solar power.
8.20.2.2 If there are no possibility, and not feasible to keep on first incomers then it can be shifted to slightly to down stream feeders/incomers by taking care to utilize maximum generation from solar power plant.
8.20.2.3 Once these control unit were being placed at particular location it might avoid feeding power to the upstream load while there is no load on down stream or injected location of solar power plant
8.20.2.4 Net Metering Scenario
8.20.2.4.1 While connecting the Grid connected string/central inverter, it will be synchronized with grid automatically. No need to provide the separate arrangement and controller for Synchronization.
No need to provide the separate arrangement and controller for Synchronization, when the plant is design and installed under net metering case, However, as Main EB meters to be fixed on the Grid incomer which must
8.20.2.4.2
be connected with communication layout of Solar Plant.
When the existing meters are communicable and having feature of capability to read the import and export energy (i.e., Bi-Directional) the same need to be connected with the communication layout by laying RS 485
8.20.2.4.3
Cable from the nearest points of network.
8.20.2.4.4 In case the existing meters does not have functions as mentioned above, a new meter shall be mounted/fixed on the incomer and need to be connected with network.
8.20.2.4.5 While new meter (Bi-Directional) to be purchased it is recommended to purchase in "Accuracy Class 0.5" with capabilities of reading import & Export power with basic parameters.
8.20.2.5 Non Net Metering Scenario
8.20.2.5.1 While connecting the Grid connected string/central inverter, it will be synchronized with grid automatically. No need to provide the separate arrangement and controller for Synchronization.
8.20.2.5.2 No need to provide the separate arrangement and controller for Synchronization, But we need to have a prevention arrangement to avoid reverse power feeding to the grid.
8.20.2.5.3 As similar to the "Synchronization with Diesel Generator" in section "8.20.1" shall be followed to place a EB/DG Power Controller with its accessories for successful synchronization with "GRID".
When the System voltage (where the EB/DG Power Controller Installed) is higher we can't go for the New CT & PT for current and voltage reference. Hence, the reference need to connected from existing one after
8.20.2.5.4
ensuring the capability of the instrument transformer.
8.20.2.5.5 The following terms and requirements are applicable for the system voltage is Higher than 25 kV.
As mentioned in earlier section the "EB/DG Power Controller" can be worked as a synchronization medium also act as a back-up protection (i.e., Reverse Power Feeding), but when the system voltage is higher than 25
8.20.2.5.6 kV the required information for power curtailments through SCADA Unit required soft data can't be supplied to SCADA unit by this controller. Hence, a Separate Bi-Directional Meter as mentioned in section
"8.20.2.4.4 & 8.20.2.4.5" need to be installed next to the EB/DG Controller.
8.20.2.5.7 The soft data to do power curtailment will be taken care by the new meters and back-up protection (i.s., Reverse Power Prevent) will be taken care by the Controller in this case.
8.20.2.5.8 However, other terms as defined above need to be checked while finalizing the location and its mounting arrangements.

8.21 Water Circulation System on the Roof (for the future maintenance)
8.21.1 A Proper Water Circulation System shall be designed, supplied and installed after successful installation of Solar Power Plant on Rooftop, or on Ground area
8.21.2 The following terms are the minimum requirement which to be considered while designing, supplying and execution of a proper water circulation system to use while maintenance activities.
8.21.3 The Water circulation system shall be designed in such a way by having all the modules will have a water tapping point in 8 meters radius. From these tapping point it will be extended by using a Flexible hose and adaptors.
8.21.4 The system shall be designed as suitable for getting minimum 4 Bar pressure in that last tapping point, when two more tapping points are functioning in different line or same circulation system.
8.21.5 Suitable pump shall be used to achieve the above-mentioned terms. It to be installed near to the tapping point or in the circulation line as per the calculation.
8.21.6 Regarding the pipeline network, all the pipeline material shall be an "uPVC Pipe (SCH 40)" with appreciate UV resistant properties also the same will be applicable for its accessories as well.
The power cable for the pump should be armoured PVC Insulated cable, it should have a proper routing and installation arrangement as like AC Cable.
8.21.7
1 Phase Outdoor power switch with rust-proof canopy & frame need to be used, RCCB and MCB need to be used for the switching of motors. The pump must be installed on the levelled surface to avoid the vibration in future.
The Pressure Booster pump always need to be considered while designing the water circulation system for the solar plant to meet the required pressure at the nozzle as mentioned above, the pump selection document should be submitted to evaluate the
8.21.8
same, the pump and other accessories can be revised during approval of the shared document, this to be cleared before initiating the purchase of the same.
Cold Water Flow Meter - Multi Jet, Magnetic Drive, Class B, Screwed Ends, Brass Body with Connectors, Need to be used along with Safety Pressure Relief Valve & pressure gauge,
8.21.9
water meter, flexible hose and pressure design approval by the Owner will be required, the layout need to be submitted along with tapping point arrangement and pump installation method.
8.21.10 A rated DOL starter should be provided with MCB and MCCB for the Booster Pump, Three Phase Power Pump or Submersible water pumps
8.21.11 A calculation file with details of calculation basis for selected pipeline size, pump delectation basis for review and approval process by BECIS.

8.22 Inverter Mounting Frame

8.22.1 Inverter to be mounted on stand which made by using Mild-Steel, and shall be treated with Hot Dip galvanized in 80 Micron Thickness. Inverter mounting on wall not be allowed.
8.22.2 Location of inverter installation should be free fall material, vehicle / material movement should be avoided, in case if not possible, required barricades should be provided for the inverter installation area.
8.22.3 Instruction mentioned on the OEM of manufacture should be followed while installation and design.
The enough clearance to be reserved at all sides of the inverter (including the gap between the inverters and b/w wall & inverter), the same to be considered while designing of its installation arrangement, for example, as mentioned in OEM installation
8.22.4
manual of Sungrow SG110 CX Inverter's, ≥800 mm to be left between the inverters for heat dissipation.
8.22.5 Canopy with trapezoidal metal sheet (Off-White colour) should be provided in case the same will be installed in outdoor area. The frame where the sheet will be fixed shall be design as per the shadow analysis
8.22.6 Modification on the canopy frame and its accessories will not allowed to do at site all material and supporting frame should be prefabricated.
8.22.7 All Sharp edges of the canopy sheet should be covered with rubber gasket or suitable endcap to avoid safety issues while installation and future maintenance.
8.22.8 Reaction summary of with Dead Load, Live load, fixing arrangement load, wind Load should be involved in the calculation of frame & foundation of Inverter mounting stand.
8.22.9 The connection between the stand can be installed with existing (fixed) material by using Civil foundation or with chemical anchors. Approval from Off taker will be required for it
8.22.10 For Outdoor installation, Platform of 1 mtr width to be given for safe operator access of inverter during rainy season.
In case of the arrangement should be done by using civil foundation, the following listed items will be required, Civil foundation design and the calculation by mentioning the uplift force of entire system by including canopy. For dead load type
8.22.11
foundation load sliding, Uplift & toppling checks are required.
8.22.12 The inverter stand column to be supported with suitable Civil foundation as per deign.
8.22.13 When the inverter is going to be installed on the ground mount section, 1 meter width passage with filling of gravel shall be provide for accessing during operation
Document No. IN-EN-MD-001
Page 24 of 37
Technical Specification Rev. 3_Q4-24

Date 28-Oct-24

General
8.23 Requirements
Identification & Information
8.23.1 Information Stickers for Plant Equipment's - UV resistant Reflective Stickers
A stickers with white background and black colour wording should be placed in all equipment's, the details of equipment name and rating to be included, size will be confirmed later.
8.23.1.1
The Equipment's are listed here but no limited, Inverters, Combiner Panel, RPR, Data Loggers, UPS, RPR, billing meters, EB & DG meters, AC & DC Cable Tray and other Panels (as per layout).
8.23.1.2 A Danger stickers with red colour background and white colour wording should be pasted on all power handling equipment's, including UPS and Data loggers.
8.23.1.3 A Earthing Symbol stickers with green colour background and yellow colour wording should be pasted on all power handling equipment's, including UPS and Data loggers.
8.23.1.4 A Dual Supply Stickers and Shutdown procedure stickers must be placed in all equipment's.
8.23.1.5 A Stickers should be placed on the AC and DC cable tray in all area, this to be placed at every 10 Meters.
8.23.1.6 The following Stickers to be placed in all inverters, LT Panel, if required the details will be shared at time of detail engineering.

8.23.1.7

8.23.2 Tags for Cables and Conduits

A Outdoor type UV Resistant Cable Tags should be used for all cable for the identifications during O&M, the tags to be prepared in Trifoliate material and all the information must be a engraved in black wording on grey back ground.
8.23.2.1
(Ref Will be shared during detailed engineering).
Tags must be used for the following but not limited, All kind of AC Cables including Control and Aux Power Supply Cable, Communication cable and DC Conduits (Inverter details and conductors type shall be printed on that, it to be
8.23.2.2
tied on the conduits at all turning on the routes for the identification of the same).
8.23.2.3 Cable tags should be fixed with cable in both ends of cable by using UV resistant cable ties
The tags for identification of DC Conduit (i.e. DWC or uPVC Conduit) must be fixed along with the details of Inverter Number, Specification and distance (this data will be required to identify the conduit and the DC cable which is
8.23.2.4
carrying towards the inverter from string). the tags on DC Cable Conduit should be placed at every 10 Meter distance from the starting point.
8.23.2.5 The Tags for the DC cable conduit to be made on Metal and the details shall be punched by its tools, also the fixing of these tags to be done by using SS Cable ties.

The tags to be provided at both end of followings,

1. DC Cable DWC Conduit (HDPE Pipe, UV Resistant) - (To be fixed qt every 10 Meters, along with Inverters Number and Direction)
2. All kind of AC Cable at all Places, (inc Inverter to Isolator to LT Panel to Solar Generation Meter Panel to injection Point)
3. All kind of Control Cable and Aux Power Supply Cable (Inc., RPR, Ref Signal, UPS Power Supply, Supply Voltage for Sensor and its unit)
8.23.2.6
4. All Kind of Communication Cable

** The tags should have the details, Cable's Specification, Start Point, End Point, & Distance.
** There should a hole in sides which will be used to tie with the cable by using cable ties.
** All letters should be in an engraved pattern

8.23.3 Asset Identification Stickers - UV resistant Reflective Stickers

8.23.3.1 A stickers with the details of equipment name, location and a code to be printed and the same should be pasted in such a way were we can found that easily.
Marking of MMS (Table) (i.e. RCC Roof, Ground Mount Roof, Car Parking & Other Raised structure) shall be done by using UV Resistant reflective stickers, the information on the stickers to be confirmed from the BECIS before
8.23.3.2
initiating the work also, the same information to be reflected in the drawing for the future reference.
8.23.3.3 The Format of stickers and codes will be shared during detailed engineering
8.23.4 Plant Information Boards
The following details should be printed on the Out door, UV Resistant foam board for the display purpose of plant details,

1. Plant Layout
2. Plant SLD
8.23.4.1 3. Safety Posters in Hindi and English
4. Shutdown Procedures in English
5. Electric Shock Treatments in English

The Details and format will be shared during the detailed engineering or at time of commissioning

8.24 Additional Requirements

8.24.1 Canopy for LT Panel
8.24.1.1 A LT Panel (ACDB) shall be installed below a covered location, such as a shed, to avoid direct sunlight exposure

8.24.1.2 The shed must be fabricated with best engineering principles and designed to withstand harsh atmospheric conditions such as cyclones.
The mechanical and civil design of these sheds should be evaluated by the BECIS engineering team by submitting the required documents. Installation activities at the site must be conducted only after receiving approval through the
8.24.1.3
designated channel.
9 Performance Tests
9.1 Following procedure to be referred for calculation of performance test of the plant after commissioning and periodically during O&M
9.2 Upon successful Takeover, reliability of the system is tested. Data is collected for entire system during reliability test period which should be at least seven consecutive days.
Following real time parameters to be sampled for one minute intervals for 7 consecutive days:

1. Solar irradiance
2. Ambient temperature
3. Module temperature
9.3 4. Wind speed
5. DC Voltage of each string
6. DC Current of each string
7. AC Voltage of each inverter
8.AC Current of each inverter
9. Energy Yield
9.4 Plant Uptime to be maintained to 100% during the tenure of test

Performance ratio is calculated by following formula,

Measured AC electrical generation (kWh)

9.5 PR = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Irradiance (kWh/m2)*Active area of PV panels (m2)*η (Solar Module Efficiency)

Calculated values to be compared with values predicted at design stage by energy modelling software PVSyst

9.6 Sensors, Module & Inverter model number to be recorded into the approved PR test format

Following Installation conditions to be ensured during PR test,

1. Sensors Installed as per approved Installation Methodology

2. Plant Full capacity charged
9.7
3. Plant should not run on EB reduction
4. Internet Connectivity should be ensured
5. Module should be cleaned before PR test only. Cleaning during PR test is not allowed
6. Communication from all sensors and meters to be ensured

10 Plant Uptime Calculation

Plant availability shall mean the actual ratio of annual hours for which the solar plant is in complete state of readiness to generate power. Which is subject to grid availability, radiation availability, load availability, and water availability for cleaning hence the same
10.1 to be taken care while calculation.
Plant availability should be calculated as follows:

The formula for calculation of plant uptime should be as follows,

% Solar Plant Availability = { Recorded hours *100 }/ {3650- (GF+FM)}

Where, Recorded Hours = [3650 – (GF+FM+U)]

3650 = Number of hours in a year available for solar generation (365 * 10 hours/ day)
10.2
GF = Grid Failure Hours

FM = Forced Majeure Hours

U= Unscheduled or forced maintenance hours for solar plants during plant in operation.
Document No. IN-EN-MD-001
Page 25 of 37
Technical Specification Rev. 3_Q4-24

Date 28-Oct-24

General Mount
11 Ground Requirements
Solar Power Plant
11.1 The following defined scope are applicable to the design, execution and commissioning of solar plant capacity more than 1 MWp and Up to 10 MWp.
Following additional details and requirements are only applicable to Grid-Connected Solar Photovoltaic System (Ground mounted) within the factory premises or on the land which is owned by the end-user. Also, it will be applicable for the plant up to 10 MWp
11.2
Capacity
The followings are the required minimum specification which must be taken care by the contractor while doing design, construction and commissioning of solar power plant. But the requirements are not limited to the listed as follows, it will be added and
11.3
communicated with contractor during technical detailed discussion.
11.4 The complete responsibility will remains with the contractors to execute the complete plan as per the requirements of BECIS.
11.5 General Requirements
11.5.1 All definitions of a Contractor’s scope of work, including but not limited to the technical specifications and description of standards of a Grid-Connected Solar Photovoltaic System (Ground mounted) are documented herewith.
The Contractor shall be catering for the Design, Supply, Installation and Commissioning of a Grid-Connected Solar Photovoltaic System. The mentioned technical specification listed herewith should be considered for the procurement of the required
11.5.2
material, also the recommended method needs to be considered while installing the plant. The EPC can propose best economical & technical solution against the minimum technical requirements mentioned herein.
11.5.3 EPC will study real site conditions before preliminary design & layout .In case of multiple options ;the EPC can propose best economical & technical solution against the minimum technical requirements mentioned herein.
11.5.4 The Contractor shall be responsible for the supply of equipment and execution of installation as per the approved drawing and methods. Sole responsibility will be of EPC which will ensure compliance with his sub agencies etc.
11.5.5 The Owners approval shall be required to supply and execute work in case of any variation or deviation.
11.5.6 In receiving and assessing this document, it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to comply with local regulations.
11.5.7 The contractor shall abide by Owners EHS policy , established rules & procedures. The contractor will be responsible for co ordination with Owners team & representatives( e.g. Owners engineer/Auditor/Third party representative)
The Contractor’s scope of work shall include, but not be limited to all necessary engineering works, equipment, systems and services required to complete a fully functional, safe, reliable and easy maintainable PV power plant connected to the public
11.5.8
grid.
11.5.9 The international system (SI) of measures & weighs shall exclusively used in design & engineering.
11.5.10 EPC will fulfil interface requirements with existing systems, structures. EPC will cooperate with other entities and parties involved in this project to achieve a smooth implementation of the PV power plant.
11.5.11 Quality management requirements will apply to all stages of project design,engineering,logistics,storage,installation,testing,commissioning & also during complete "Defect liability period".
11.6 System Design Criteria

11.6.1 The system shall be designed and constructed for a minimum functional life of 30 years.
11.6.2 The system shall be designed and constructed in a manner to optimize generation considering parasitic losses due to PV module shading, soiling, wire losses, inverter losses, switchgear losses, and transformer losses (if applicable).
11.6.3 All structures must be designed in accordance with all applicable codes and standards.
Voltage insulation levels, grounding, equipment interrupting, continuous current capacities, circuit protection and mechanical strengths of structure and the roof / building shall be selected and coordinated in accordance with calculations and the
11.6.4
recommendations of the IEC and other local applicable codes and standards as noted.
Photovoltaic Modules, Array Junction box, DC cable impedance values, String monitoring Box, Tracker system, Central/String Inverter, Plant Monitoring equipment, Electrical panels/encloser, and installed switchgear shall conform to the
11.6.5
manufacturer’s published data sheet(s).
11.6.6 Initial design proposal will be shared by EPC for approval of Owner. EPC will share detailed engineering & BoM after approval of initial design for Owners approval.
11.6.7 The PV power plant shall be designed for full output at particular site's full range of solar irradiance & ambient temperature.
11.6.8 All components and equipment shall be selected considering easy maintenance, simple and quick diagnosis and trouble free long life. Similar or identical equipment s & accessories to be selected for equivalent functions.
11.7 Structural Assessment

11.7.1 The contractor should do the complete assessments study of complete projects which includes power evacuation points.
11.7.2 Contractor should carry the detailed survey of projects before initiating the estimation and submission of bids. All the following analysis and requirements must be included in the design without deviating

11.7.3 Topographical survey

11.7.3.1 The topographical survey should be done by the contractor at the project location by considering the terms and condition as mentioned as follows

11.7.3.2 Positions both in plan and elevation of all natural and artificial features of the area like to be established and subsequently be shown on survey maps by means of conventional symbols (preferably symbols of Survey of India maps).

Waterways
Railway tracks
Trees
Cultivation
11.7.3.3
Houses/any Structure
Fences
Metalled roads and Unmetalled roads including culverts and crossings
Foot Tracks, other permanent objects like telephone posts and transmission towers etc
11.7.3.4 All earth deposits, depressions, hills and valleys within the area/areas are to be surveyed and plotted on maps by contours.
Necessary levelling work of the entire area/ areas are to be surveyed and plotted on maps by establishing horizontal location so that location and sketching of contours for the area/ areas can be done at specified intervals and in specified
11.7.3.5
scales on maps.
In case of steep slopes and dense jungle etc where griding is not possible, the method of survey, contour intervals etc shall be decided by the engineer-in-charge at site. Any unusual condition or formations on the ground, location of
11.7.3.6
rock outcrops and springs/falls etc shall also be noted and plotted on the maps.

11.7.3.7 The field work shall be done with total station equipment in the following steps.

a. Establishing horizontal and vertical controls and locating reference grids and bench mark in the area.
11.7.3.8 b. Surveying for establishing spot levels and plotting contours.
c. Surveying for locating natural and man made details as described earlier.

11.7.4 Preparation of & Submission of Survey Maps: -

The contractor shall submit survey maps of the site in 1:1000 scale indicating grid lines (with levels) and contour lines, demarcating all permanent features like roads, railways, waterways, buildings, power lines, natural
11.7.4.1
streams, trees etc. Project area should have two originals, one showing spot levels and contours (with contour line interval of 1m) with grid lines and other with grid lines, contour lines and permanent features.
11.7.4.2 The survey report should also cover the following.
a. General site observation such as location of access roads, river and nallah courses, irrigation canals etc.
b. Presence of any well and /or tube well in the site and water level in them shall also be indicated.
11.7.4.3
c. Whether there is any rock outcrops in the site.
d. Existing drainage pattern of the site, possibility of water logging and high flood level of the area.

11.7.5 Hydrology Analysis Methods :-

11.7.5.1 Hydrologic analyses are performed to quantify the volumetric flow rate of water draining from a watershed (i.e., drainage area) over time.

Hydrological analysis is based on a digital elevation model (DEM) raster data to establish a water system model, which is used to study the hydrological characteristics and simulation of surface hydrological process, and make a
11.7.5.2 forecast for the surface hydrological situation in the future. The hydrological analysis model can help us to analyse the scope of the flood, position the runoff pollution sources, and predict geomorphological change on runoff. It is widely
used in regional planning, agriculture, forestry, disaster prediction, road design, and many other industries and fields.
There are two recommended methods which been derived below to do the same at the project location. The contractor must conduct these analyses by following the methods, in case any queries they should discuss with BECIS to
11.7.5.3
conclude on that.
Contractor shall prepared study report based on last 50 years flood study, basis on various calculations and checks as per standard methods. He should conclude water flow and water logging in the plot also required water drainage plan
11.7.5.4
i.e. required drain size inside and outside of plant, required culvert size such that there should not be water logging problem inside the plot.
Conceptual methods in this category simulate, with a mathematical model, channel flow and watershed runoff processes. Movement and storage of water through the watershed are simulated at varying time and space scales, with
varying degrees of complexity, omitting, including, or combining elements, depending on the model used and the requirements of the study.
11.7.5.5
** Conceptual methods that designers may use include the Rational method (loosely classified as a conceptual method here) and the hydrograph method.

Like conceptual methods, empirical methods also use a mathematical relation that predicts the design flow, given properties of the watershed, channels, rainfall, or streamflow. However, the relationship does not represent explicitly the
11.7.5.6
physical processes. Instead, the relationships are derived with statistical analyses. (Some analysts even refer to empirical methods as black box methods because the presentation of the process is not visible and obvious.)

11.7.6 Site clearance, Cutting & filling:-

11.7.6.1 The project location should be surveyed clearly by the contractor with mentioning the obstacles including the trees, jungles, dese forest if any.
11.7.6.2 The contractor should have taken the all the activities to clear or remove an obstacle for the solar plant from the project location which been observed during survey and detailed engineering.
Clearance of jungles and cutting of trees as required to facilitate the survey work also form part of the contract. Necessary permission of concerned public bodies shall be secured by the owner. The contractor shall ensure that minimum
11.7.6.3
amount of jungles are cleared and trees are properly cut under the direction of public bodies. The trees and jungles as cleared shall be stacked and handed over to the engineer-in charge/owner.
Contractor need to submit required cutting & filling quantity by considering proper water drainage, considering depth of foundation for various superstructure, Drain, culvert, roads, plinth required for various civil structures and
11.7.6.4
development of the plot as required.
11.8 Electrical Assessment & Components Selection (Ground Mount Projects)
There will few additional component requirements for the completion of ground mounted solar plant in large scale. A few major components of the system are listed below along with its minimum requirements (The followings are the additional
11.8.1
requirements apart from applicable requirements of the system as mentioned above sections)
11.8.2 It is in the scope of contractor to design and execute the system and its utilities to meet the requirements as per BECIS requirements

11.8.3 All the requirements of BECIS of each major components being listed below in the following sections, the contractor should take care of them to meet the requirements with successful commissioning of complete solar power plant with its utilities.
Document No. IN-EN-MD-001
Page 26 of 37
Technical Specification Rev. 3_Q4-24

Date 28-Oct-24

General Requirements
After initial survey at the project location, the contractor should have a detailed engineering discussion with BECIS system if in the case where is no clarity on the scope of contractor, as per the mutual discussion and agreement the contractors should
11.8.4
proceed further.
11.8.5 The contractor need to submit all the details specification documents of the following equipment's / packages for the approval and further proceeding from BECIS

1. DCDB / SMB - String Monitoring Box

3. Central Inverters
4. ACDB - AC Combiner Panel - In case where there are multiple Inverter being connected
11.8.6 5. Power Transformer - Step-Up/Step-Down
6. High Voltage Switchgear (Indoor or Outdoor)
7. Outdoor Switchyards and its accessories including, CT, PT, Breaker Unit and Supporting accessories
8. Metering Arrangement

11.8.7 The Minimum requirements of above-mentioned equipment's are being listed in following section, the contractor should comply all requirements as mentioned.
11.8.8 The contractor can propose the cost optimization arrangement in the case of having control on complete project costing, the same can be implemented but subjected to the approval from BECIS and End-user.
11.8.9 All the technical requirement should be considered by the contractor, while proposing the cost optimization arrangement by the contractor. Also, relevant documents should be submitted for approval of BECIS

11.8.10 String monitoring Unit

All the DC Side to be combined together near the PV Module array while the case of Central inverter being used. It depend son the project scale and specific requirements w.r.t capacity and type of inverter which will be used at site as
11.8.10.1
per configuration.
11.8.10.2 There are some specific requirements on the design of String monitoring box or DCDB, the contractor should follow and fulfil all these minimum requirements of BECIS while designing and executing the same.
11.8.10.3 Customizable DC connection box with minimum 24 inputs with standard protection features i.e., fuse and DC Load break switch on Output side up to 1500V r,1600 Amp & multi circuit switching with extended rotary handle
11.8.10.4 All the DC Incoming side shall be protected with PV cylindrical HRC fuse (IEC 60269-6 ,UL 2759) for protection against reverse currents & safe disconcertion in event of fault
Apart from the protection through the fuse and load break switch, the DC circuit to be protected from lightening as well, and it shall have a sufficient provision to handle the lightening, i.e., the circuit shall have a Type 1&2 surge
11.8.10.5
protection
11.8.10.6 The earthing terminal of DSPD shall be grounded properly with a proper arrangement, and it is recommended to use rated or suggested cross-section wiring on SPD & its relevant arrangements
11.8.10.7 These kind of string monitoring box shall have provision of communication over RS 485 mod-bus communication.
It shall have a proper arrangement to have a string level monitoring i.e., String current, string voltage and status of fuse to be recorded and communicated with the SCADA system which is supplied by BECIS or other entity. Necessary
11.8.10.8
arrangement should be considered by the contractor
11.8.10.9 There should be a proper isolation between the incoming and outgoing side of the DC Supply, but considering the require space in the cabin during maintenance activities at time of operation
11.8.10.10 There shall be a proper arrangement for connecting the DC String input cable with /through the MC4 connectors
11.8.10.11 Also, the proper arrangement require for connecting the output cable through double compression glands
11.8.10.12 Load breaker switch which shall be used in the DC output side shall be a 4 pole to make sure the double breaking in DC Side.
11.8.10.13 The Bus bar which will be used in this combiner shall be a "Tin-coated or copper".
11.8.10.14 The complete arrangements shall be enclosed in the polycarbonate double door enclosure, with IP 65 rating.
11.8.10.15 The enclosure shall have a proper installation arrangement to install with the HDG Stand with canopy.
11.8.10.16 Preferred installation location is under PV Modules by validating the shadow at finalized location, else the complete canopy shall be design and executed
Specification sheet along with all details about the components shall be submitted by the contractor for getting an approval and review purpose of BECIS, the contractors should in-incorporated the comments provided by BECIS during
11.8.10.17
design review and validation
11.8.10.18 Civil foundation for installation of String monitoring box shall be done as per the requirements of BECIS by considering the pile foundation method (GA of Civil work to be submitted)
11.8.10.19 There should be a enough clearance between bottom of string monitoring box and FGL. The same applicable for all sides.

11.8.11 Central Inverter

11.8.11.1 Depending up on the project capacity and specific requirement the contractor can use the central inverter on suitable capacity to meet the requirements of BECIS
11.8.11.2 Reputed or approved OEM only will be allowed with approved specification
11.8.11.3 The following minimum requirement should be considered while selecting the inverter
11.8.11.4 While selecting the inverters the following minimal requirement should be considered by the contractor without fail
1. All these inverter should have highly performance and reliable service life of at least 25 years
2. All these type inverters shall have a modules enclosures which can be considered for indoor installation as well outdoor installation
3. The efficiency of the unit shall not be lesser that 98.5%
4. The limit of DC side must be 1500 V, all the components on the DC Side shall be rated above these range
5. There should not be any derating on the generation up to 50 deg C
6. Proper isolation arrangement for AC and DC sides of inverters
7. It should have Efficient maximum power point tracking to make sure achievement of highly generation
8. It shall have self-contained cooling system in power module cooling it shall be a innovative, low-maintenance cooling solution
9. The synchronization with the grid and other utilities on the AC sides should be done within limited delay
10. The complete system should have the Low auxiliary power consumption with high efficiency
11. The system design should be done with modular kind of arrangement in manner to reduce space consumptions
12. When the inverter will be installed on the outdoor location, then it should have arrangements for the Water- and dustproof outdoor enclosure and it Designed to withstand the toughest environments
13. It shall have a internal control unit Wide ranged and highly efficient MPPT algorithm
14. It shall have Wide communication options, the preference of communication mode is over RS 485 Mod-Bus communication
15. The inverter unit shall have a provision for supplying auxiliary loads, the required rated capacity is 10 KVA
16. There should be a provision in the inverter to connect the Bus duct as well, the requirements to be finalized mutually with BECIS at time of approval
17. Shall be selected with suitable required arrangement to connect AC, and DC Cable

11.8.12 ACDB - AC Combiner Panel

11.8.12.1 ACDB shall be used in the plant to combine the AC output from the inverters which is two or more than two nos.
11.8.12.2 The complete design of ACDB shall be done as directed in the "section number 8.15"
11.8.12.3 Along with ACDB Specification, the enough and require arrangement to handle the auxiliary power requirements of the complete projects. The size, and rating of this unit shall be decided by considering the same.
Apart from the rating, the form of output from ACDB shall be taken care on top priority as it is a critical & important requirements which must meet the requirements of power transformer. The output from the ACDB towards Power
11.8.12.4
transformers shall be taken through in "Cable" or with "Bus duct". However, the rating and installation arrangement should be done systematically by ensuring BECIS requirements.

11.8.12.5 A separate unit called "Aux power Supply Distribution Panel" shall be designed and installed in the control room to handle the auxiliary power requirements when ACDB is not require as per the scheme as approved by BECIS

11.8.13 Power transformer

The Power transformer shall be considered as per the requirements to step-up /down the voltage level to meet the requirements of the grid availability at the power evacuation point, There are feet set of minimum requirements which to
11.8.13.1
be considered by the contract while designing, selecting and execution of transformers and it related accessories as per project requirements & as per standards IS2026, IS1180, IEC 60076
11.8.13.2 The related accessories are defining here is the control unit of transformer, OLTC of transformer, fire prevention arrangement & its sites, Oil managements system for the transformer and yard if multiple transformer being used
11.8.13.3 These transformers shall be placed in the transformer yard which shall be constructed by fulfilling the requirements as mentioned in section "11.9.3" with requirements of local body i.e., DISCOM
11.8.13.4 Oil filled inverter duty transformers are recommended to use for the PV Application
11.8.13.5 Generally, "1:1" Winding configuration of transformers preferred by considering the operation feasibility. The LT Side of power line shall be combined and connected to the transformer in case, there are multiple inverters units
The combining of LT Side should be done by using the proper electrical switchgear units and required configurations as per BECIS requirements. The mentioned specification in section no "11.8.12" - should be fulfilled by the
11.8.13.6
contractor while designing and execution.
11.8.13.7 Also, the multi winding transformer (on LT Side) can be used after taking an approval from BECIS by submitting the required documents as mention below
11.8.13.8 Required documents which to be submitted by the contractor for getting an approval from BECIS to proceed further on the design and execution
1). Detailed Technical specification (Similar to shared sample Documents)
2). Detailed Engineering Calculation for transformer sizing
3). OEM guarantied design calculation
4). Efficiency Calculation
5). GA OF Transformer with termination arrangement
6). Civil foundation of Transformer along with trafo yard design
7). Transformer Protection arrangement (Electrically)
8). Raw Material test certificates from OEM, Chemical analysis certificate of winding material to ensure the purity
11.8.13.9 The above mentioned documents as minimum requirements but not limited to the listed, few additional documents will be asked to submit for the design validation
The transformer design shall be done as suitable for the power transmission/distribution from Solar Power plant. It shall be suitable for working as a Step-Down transformer with an same efficiency while there is load on utility side
11.8.13.10
when solar power plant is under shutdown condition
11.8.13.11 Using power transformer as a transformer for utility load must be avoided. It can be used when there is a proper design approval from BECIS and design grandee from OEM for achieving the required efficiency
11.8.13.12 The transformer ant its related accessories & utilities shall be designed in a manner to work in high accuracy the necessary prevention and factor must be considered in the design calculation with safety factor of 1.5 Times
Document No. IN-EN-MD-001
Page 27 of 37
Technical Specification Rev. 3_Q4-24

Date 28-Oct-24

General Requirements About the vector group, Solar Power Transformer shall be designed in manner by taking care of other transformer which is connected in parallel l with the unit in the grid or the factory side. An approval from End-user shall be require
11.8.13.13
along with the BECIS approval when the plant is installed for the captive generation
11.8.13.14 Regarding the impedance, it is the most important factor hence it is recommended to get an detailed requirements from BECIS at time of project allocation and discussion to avoid inconvenience at later stage
All the requirement of BECIS will be communicated over the shared details technical specification, the contractors are requested to get a clarity of the further technical requirements as per the relevant standards and local body
11.8.13.15
requirements.
11.8.13.16 All the requirements on the transformer yard and its foundation as mentioned in the section "11.9.3" should be fulfilled by the contractors without fail, the deviation from the minimum requirements will not be allowed.
The electrical requirements, shall be done as directed in the relevant standards (100 kVA to 200 MVA as per IS11171 & IEC 60076, Up to 33kV line voltage) and local body requirements. The design and executions shall be done by
11.8.13.17
considering the terms mentioned in the following standards
11.8.13.18 The following are the major accessories requirements which must be fixed on the oil filled transformers
11.8.13.19 Buchholz Relay
a Transformers shall be provided with double float Buchholz relay fitted in the pipe connecting the tank and the conservator pipe and shall have the following dimension,
b 25 mm dia. for transformers up to and including 1000 KVA.
c 50 mm dia for ratings from 1 MVA to 10 MVA.
d 80 mm dia for ratings above 10 MVA.
e In additional, oil surge relay shall be provided for OLTC (if applicable)
f Pipe shall be arranged at a rising angle of 3 to 9 degrees to the horizontal, up to the Buchholz relay. Valves shall be provided on either side of relay after providing necessary length of straight pipes.
g The relay shall have pet cocks at the top and bottom, drain plug, inspection windows, calibrated scale to indicate gas present, built in test facility and terminal box with oil tight brass gland.
The relay shall have electrically separate; potential free self reset contacts for alarm and trip. Contacts shall be rated to make, carry & break 0.5 Amp. At 110 V DC. The contacts shall be wired to Marshalling box. The
h
relay shall conform to IS: 3637 (C 1966).
i Copper pipe of nominal diameter 5 mm shall be connected from the relay test cock to a valve located about 1.25 M above ground level to facilitate sampling of gas when the transformer in service.
11.8.13.20 Explosion Vent / Pressure Relief Device (PRD)
a Pressure relief device shall be provided for Transformer
b Pressure relief device provided shall be of sufficient volume for rapid release of any pressure that maybe generated within the tank and which might result in damage to the equipment.
c The device shall operate at a static pressure of less than the hydraulic test pressure for transformer tank
d Shall be provided to prevent ingress of rainwater.
e The relief device shall be mounted on the main tank and if on the cover shall be fitted with skirt projecting 25 mm inside the tank and of such a design to prevent gas accumulation.
f If diaphragm is used, it shall be of suitable design and material and situated above max oil level
g The equaliser pipe connecting the pressure relief device and conservator shall be provided for relieving or equalising the pressure in the pressure relief device.
11.8.13.21 Temperature Indicators
150 mm & dial type top oil, and winding temperature indicator for the HV & LV windings shall be provided for all transformers. Further an additional terminal of winding temperature indicator for automatic control of
a
Blowers shall be provided.
Each thermometer shall have potential free NO alarm contact and trip contact. No multiplying contactor / relay shall be used. Temp. Setting of each contact shall be independently adjustable at site. A manual reset type
b
maximum temperature indicator shall be provided for each thermometer.
c The temperature-sensing element mounted in pockets of oil on the top cover of the transformer shall be connected to the indicating elements through capillary tube.
d Each winding temp indicator shall have temp. Sensing element, image coil and bushing mounted current transformer.
e Each thermometer shall be provided with remote temp. Indicator along with associated Accessories. The remote temperature Indicators shall be mounted on relay panel.
The local winding temperature indicator shall be provided with necessary contacts for Automatic starting and stopping of cooling fans, alarm and trip functions. Settings for closing and opening contacts shall be
f
independently adjustable.
g All contacts shall be rated to make 0.5 A (min) and break 0.2 A (min) at 110 V DC. All contacts shall be wired to Marshalling box.
h In addition to the above winding temperature indicators /controllers shall be provided, for control of forced cooling system of the transformer.
i 4-20 mA signals for oil and winding temperatures shall be made available for interfacing with SCADA placed at MRSS.
j All above specifications are applicable for auxiliary power transformer too. However, the details specification, drawing GA needs to be submitted by the contractor for an approval from BECIS.

11.8.14 High Voltage Switchgear (Indoor or Outdoor)

11.8.14.1 High voltage switchgear shall be designed and executed by the contractor within the plant to handle the switching of HT line at power evacuation arrangements
11.8.14.2 The type of switch gear shall be a Compact Modular Type or a Outdoor Type open switchyard, the same shall be designed as per the project requirements & Scheme of Power evacuation arrangements.
The requirements are listed below for both type of switch gears a system, the contractor should consider the same while designing & executing the same at project location after taking necessary approval from BECIS on all kind of
11.8.14.3
drawing & Specifications
11.8.14.4 Compact Modular Type HT Panel
To handle the HT tension system, the "Compact Modular Type HT Switchgear" and its unit shall be used with providing necessary arrangements. Also, the complete switch yard can be designed in open switch yard type
11.8.14.4.1
where the project capacity is more than 50 MW or based on the project requirements.
The following requirements and specifications are applicable to the compacted modular type switch yard which are includes, ICOG Panel, Metering arrangements, instruments transformer and its control units. There
11.8.14.4.2
separate requirements and specification will be released and given for the outdoor type switch yards and its it requirements
11.8.14.4.3 The complete design, and execution of compact & Modular type HT Panel shall be done by considering Improved aesthetics, easy maintenance, and efficient functioning with reducing downtime of the plant
As defined the system shall be designed as per the project requirements either indoor outdoor or a combined form, However, the contract should consider the following needs while designing, manufacturing, assembly
11.8.14.4.4
and Testing at manufactures works. But it is not limited to the mentioned. All relevant and applicable specification & requirements which are not listed needs to be taken care of consideration by default.
All the switchgear (HT Panel) and its unit shall be designed to handle the rated voltage as per the power evacuation arrangement allocated for the solar plant. Also, the safety factor 1.25 time should be considered for
11.8.14.4.5 every design related calculation. It is the minimum require safety factor it might increase based on the design requirements The contractor should get clarification about the requirements on each packages from BECIS
during design review and approval stages.
The breaking capacity, short circuit handling mechanism, interlocking arrangements, prevention from fire incident, and minimum switchgear protections should be ensured by the contractor on every stage. It is
11.8.14.4.6
applicable for each component which will be used on HT Panel and its unit. The selection of components shall be done by considering these requirements.
All the design related requirements which will be communicated through the initial SLD (master reference), the contractor should consider the same for the further designing. Along with the SLD, the actual
11.8.14.4.7
requirements of as per the power evacuation schemes should be considered if the same is being missed on the given inputs and it is a mandatory requirement as per the local body and standard arrangement.
11.8.14.4.8 The following are the minimum requirements on the compact & modular type HT Panel and its unit which must be complied by the contractors
It is the contractors responsibility to provide the completed systematic solution for efficient and trouble-free operation of plant for its designed life span Along with fulfilling the all kind of requirements of BECIS and
11.8.14.4.9
applicable standards.
11.8.14.4.10 All the civil works related requirements should be fulfilled as defined in this technical specification, the proper coordination should be done by contractor to ensure the proper implementation on complete aspect.
All the design related calculation and the revised SLD as designed based on the project requirements shall be submitted by the contractor for the review and approval purpose of BECIS. Manufacturing shall be initiated
11.8.14.4.11
after getting a proper approval on the proposed and designed scheme. The comments during review should be incorporated on further revisions.
The followings are the applicable standards but not limited to the mentioned. Further standards will be added based on the location and region requirements. The contractor should consider the same at time of design
11.8.14.4.12
and execution

IEC 62271-100/200 - Specification for HV Switchgear and Control gear

IS 13118 : Specification for HV AC Circuit Breaker
IS 2099 : Specification for HV porcelain bushings.
IS 5621 : Specification for porcelain hollow insulator.
IS 8603 : Specification for Dimension for Porcelain Transformer Bushing for use in heavily polluted area.
IS 3347 : Specification for Dimension for Porcelain Transformer Bushing for use in normal and lightly polluted area.
11.8.14.4.13 IS 2633 : Specification for method for testing uniformity of coating On Zinc coated articles.
IS 5561 : Specification for Electrical Power Connectors
IS 2147 : Specification for Degree of Protection
IS 2705 Current Transformer
IS 3156 Voltage Transformer
IS 12729 Switchgear & Control gear for voltage Exceeding 1000 v General requirement
IS 4710 Switchgear and switch isolators above 1.0 KV but not exceeding 33 KV

11.8.14.4.14 Enclosures of Switchgears - (11/22/33 kV)

The modular type switchgear shall be in a vertically mounted type feeders as per the required scheme of power evacuation system. There should be an individual duly coupled panel shall be considered where there is
1
two or more power generation unit connected through rated transformers.
There should be separate feeders for all incoming, outgoings and bus potential transformer feeders. (Bus potential transformer must be considered where two or more inputs are being combined in the HT Panel and
2
unit)
When the HT panel and unit designed for single input and output it shall be done by adding a separate cable termination chamber and Breaker loaded potential transformers (refer the following details for further
3
information's)
The design of the complete enclosure shall be designed for IP54 which can be installed in indoor, in case if the same need to be installed in an outdoor location, the necessary modification on the design needs to be done
4
to meet the requirements of IP65 or higher as per the requirements
CRCA sheet with 2 mm thickness sheet or as per the standard requirements shall be used for the fabrication of all kind of metals in the HT Panel including the outer enclosure of the unit. The gland plate shall be 3 mm
5
Thickness
All the metal body of the HT Panel enclosure shall be designed suitable to handle the worst case scenario like short circuit. All kind of design must comply the requirements of IEC standards and local standard as per
6
the region.
7 Internal live portions shall be placed, and mounted by considering the minimum required clearance.
8 The HT Panel and the unit shall be designed as a standalone type, the bottom side of unit shall have the proper arrangement to install on the floor of control room or above the cable trench
Document No. IN-EN-MD-001
Page 28 of 37
Technical Specification Rev. 3_Q4-24

Date 28-Oct-24

General Requirements 9 The proper clearance in side the cubical need to be maintained as per the applicable standard and requirements of local body (i.e., DISCOM)
All the cubicle and enclosure shall be designed to handle critical scenarios like short circuit and fire incidents if occurs while functioning. The fixing method and material quality shall be designed by keeping them on the
10
consideration.
All the doors in the HT Panel and unit shall have an acrylic sheet along with warning and danger sticker to avoid the accidental touch while maintenance activities. The enough and necessary action shall be done at time
11
of initial fabrication
12 The doors shall have a OEM supplied mechanical interlock which will be mounted inside the door and prevent opening the door while the circuit breaker in the connected position.
13 The HT Panel and the unit shall have a proper arrangement for the future expansion if require.

11.8.14.4.15 Circuit Breaker Cubicle

1 There should be a proper enclosed and isolated housing of the VCB along with mechanical spring operated shutter to protect / cover the live terminal while keeping the VCB in test, & Isolated position
2 Requirements of circuit breaker shall be considered at time of designing the breaker compartments on HT Panel and unit
There should be a proper rack-In and rack-Out arrangement for the circuit breakers which will be installed. The same shall be supported properly with main structure of the HT Panel and unit to ensure proper function
3
at time of operation
A glass window on the external door of circuit breaker unit shall be considered to check the positioning of the breakers. Also, there should a marking on the door to get to know the status & positioning of circuit breaker
4
without opening front door
11.8.14.4.16 Metering & Control Cubical
1 Separate compartments shall be available for the metering and control gears.
All the protection relay, meters shall be a flush mount type (i.e., cut-out type, shall be fixed on hinged door). The doors shall have enough strength to handle complete weight of control gears which will be mounted over
2
there and the provisions for the wiring arrangements.

3 All kind of control gears including the transformer protection should be fixed in this compartments, the size of these compartments shall be considered by consider all requirements with respect to the project needs

The Current transformer shall be installed on each feeders, there shall be a proper accessing arrangement of nameplate . The enough and mount arrangement of current transformer shall be considered on the body of HT
4
panel and unit
As defined above, the potential transformer requirement which will be changed based on the project requirements. However the incoming feeder should comes with Potential transformer which is fixed on the circuit
5
breakers with an proper access arrangements from front side of the cubicle.

6 If the Potential transformer for bus require, it shall be provided in manner of circuit breaker type which is fixed on the rack-In, rack-out trolley similar to the VCB in a separate feeder named as a "Bus PT Feeder".

7 All the Current transformer should be installed in a manner by providing proper access at time of any maintenance or repair. Also, the cubical shall be designed by handling its weight.

11.8.14.4.17 Cable Termination Chamber

The HT Panel and its unit shall have a proper arrangement for installing the cables on its feeder, the same can be considered in rear side where the number of incoming is more than "One (1)". When the case if the panel
1
is a Single Input and Single Output (IGOG) then the separate cable termination chambers needs to be provided for better accessing and termination without having any obstacles due to live functioning

2 The Cable termination chamber shall be designed with similar metal structure with by considering holding weights of cable.
There should be a sufficient support with nonconducting & non-magnetic material to tie the cables with it in manner to avoid adding weight of cable to the termination points since it could lead to a critical issue at later
3
stage
4 The gland plate shall be designed in manner to have an removable type (in form of two different plate with an cut-out to pass the cable through it)
An acrylic sheet with danger and warning stickers shall be used in next to the front door to avoid the accidental touch while it is in operation. The same is applicable for all location in the HT Panel and its unit including
5
control supply)
6 The front door of cable termination chamber shall be a bolted type, the same shall be designed in manner to provided enough clearance as per the requirements to handle the rated voltage of the unit.

11.8.14.4.18 Breakers - VCB (11/22/33 kV)

1 The circuit breaker shall be of vacuum type with rated breaking capacity (Minimum 36 kA) and making capacity (Minimum 60 kA) as per SLD & Power evacuation arrangements requirements
2 The circuit breakers shall be fully draw-out type, having service, test and disconnected positions with positive indicators for service & test positions on front door. Necessary arrangement shall be considered.
3 The OEM of circuit breaker and its type to be selected as per the requirements of BECIS & end-user if any.
The breakers shall have motor operated spring charged mechanism. It shall be possible to charge the springs manually, if, required. Breakers shall be trip free and shall have an anti-pumping device. The operating duty
4
cycle shall be 0 -0.3 sec-CO-3 min.-CO
5 For motor, spring charging shall take place automatically after each breaker closing operation. One open-close-open operation of the circuit breaker shall be possible after failure of power supply to the motor.
6 Automatic safety shutters shall be provided to ensure the inaccessibility of live parts after the breaker is drawn out. There shall be distinct overall door for the breaker compartment and shall be lockable.
Truck shall have distinct service, Test and Isolated positions. It shall be possible to close the breaker compartment door in isolated position also. The truck and breaker frame shall get earthed while the truck is being
7
inserted in the panel and positive earthing of the truck and breaker frame shall be maintained in all positions.
8 Outgoing breakers shall be suitable for switching transformers, motors at any load.
9 Mechanical safety interlocks shall be provided to prevent malfunctioning (if required)

10 Temperature derating factor to be considered while designing and selection of switchgear. The ambient temperature and the temperature inside the cubicle must be taken in consideration during design calculation

11 Equipment and component rating and quantities shall be suitably selected according to the requirements with adequate margin and safety factor 1.2 Times
12 Closing and tripping coil shall operate satisfactorily under the following conditions.
12.a Closing Coil: 85% to 110% of rated voltage.
12.b Tripping Coil : 70% to 110% of rated voltage Closing coil and tripping coil must be rated for continues current and interchangeable.
The major components of the circuit breaker i.e., Closing coil, tripping coil, spring charging motor and other control equipment's shall be designed to suitable for 110 V AC from the centralized UPS.
13 (* The standalone UPS with battery backup shall be provided for the operation of HT Panel, Transformer control gears operating voltage, along with few emergency utilities, refer the section "11.8.18 & 11.819" for
detailed requirements)
14 The current rating of the circuit breaker shall be selected as per the requirements. All the circuit breaker which will be used on the HT Panel and unit shall be tested Internal Arc Test (20 k Amp for 0.1 sec)

11.8.14.4.19 Protection Relays - Microprocessor Based (G/f, UV, OV, 50,51,51N)

A numerical relay shall be Microprocessor based one, and it have appropriate setting ranges, accuracy or calculation, wide range setting range, and other characteristics to ensure sensitive functioning at time of any fault
1
occurs on the system. All numerical relays shall be compatible with IEC 61850 & IS-3231 (1987)/IEC 60255 (All parts)
2 All protective relays shall be in draw out or plug-in type / modular cases with proper testing facilities
3 All AC operated relays shall be suitable for operation at 50 Hz. AC voltage operated relays shall be suitable for 110 Volts (from UPS).
4 All protective relays and alarm relays shall be provided with one extra isolated pair of contacts wired to terminals exclusively for future use.
All the connection with numerical relays shall be done with HSR Fuse and suitable rated MCB. Also the relay shall have a additional provisions of 2 FO port +1 RJ45 Port vie following specifications as per IEC 61850
5
Protocol
6 The relays shall have the following tools for fault diagnostics:
6.1 Fault record : The relay shall have the facility to store at least 100 last fault records with information on cause of trip, date, time, trip values of electrical parameters.
6.2 Event record : The relay shall have the facility to store at least 1000 time stamped event records with 1ms resolution.
6.3 Disturbance records : The relay shall have capacity to store at least 50 disturbance record waveforms at 1 sec.
6.4 Event log, trip log and disturbance record should go in to history.
6.5 The relay settings shall be provided with adequate password protection.
7 The relays shall have the following Protections or Additional relay to be Added to meet he design requirements
7.1 Instantaneous and Inverse time phase over current relay (50, 51)Inverse time Earth fault current relay (51N)
7.2 Directional inverse time phase over current relay (67)
7.3 Directional inverse time Earth fault current relay (67N)
7.4 Bus-bar differential relay (87B)- only for 11/22/33kV switchgear (if required)
7.5 Reverse blocking mechanics for 11/22/33kV switchgear (if required)
7.6 Cable differential relay (87C) for 11/22/33kV remote switchgears (If required)
7.7 Under voltage Protection (27)
7.8 Over voltage Protection (59)
7.9 Fault Disturbance Recorder (DR)
7.1 Additional for Transformer Feeder
7.11 Instantaneous and Inverse time phase over current (50,51)
7.12 Inverse time Earth fault current (51N)
7.13 Instantaneous Earth fault current (50N)- for Transformer feeder (delta connected HV winding)
7.14 REF and SEF
8 Along with above feeder protection, there shall be a separate relay considered for further added protection in manner to give protection to the transformer and it utilities.
All relays shall conform to the requirements of IS: 3231 / IEC-60255/ IEC 61850. Relays shall be suitable for flush or semi-flush mounting on the front with connections from the rear. The relay for entire project shall
be of same type, all the setting shall be done by co-ordination chart. The relays shall be communicable type from various communication protocol, it should have USB / ethernet communication port and RS485 / RS232
9
serial communication port for communication, IEC 61850 Ed II (with high-speed GOOSE communication and certified by KEMA/CPRI certificate level A for IEC 61850 compliance), Licensed version of the relay
software should be provided as per user’s requirement.
Document No. IN-EN-MD-001
Page 29 of 37
Technical Specification Rev. 3_Q4-24

Date 28-Oct-24

General Requirements 11.8.14.4.20 Control Gears

1 The HT panel and its unit shall be equipped with all kind of control gear. The necessary control gears of transformer also to be considered and placed in the HT Panel's feeder it self
2 All control gears shall be designed to function in 110 V AC supply from UPS.
3 All the cable terminated chamber must be accomplished with Space heater with individual disconnection arrangements which could be used to do the disconnection whenever it is require.
4 All kind of indication lamp must be added on the HT Panel and its unit itself (on meter compartments) along with it wiring requirements to ensure proper dressing at back side of doors.
5 A trip circuit supervision circuit must be installed in every incoming and outgoing feeders of the HT Panel and unit. Circuit breaker closing signal shall be given based of the signal from these circuit.
6 All the feeders closing circuit shall be designed to have a Auto/Manual functioning. And there should be a provision for connecting external trip signal in every feeders tripping circuit.

11.8.14.4.21 Instrument Transformers - HT, Resin Cast

Another important components of HT Panel and its unit is an instrument transformer. Which includes the Current transformer, Potential transformer and core-balanced current transformer which will act a primary
1
sensing unit to ensure proper functioning of the system. It must be designed by fulfilling the following minimum requirements and necessary require needs as per applicable standards and local body requirements.

2 All kind of instrument transformers which will be used in the HT panel and its unit shall be a "Resin cast" only with rated insulated capacity (higher than the system voltage).
3 All these to be designed, and manufactured by considering necessary requirements as per the system requirements. Along with safety factor of 1.2 Times.
4 All these components shall be manufactured with having an appreciate able fixing arrangements to make sure the proper installation arrangements
Along with installation arrangement and type there are few additional important parameters which must be taken care of consideration while design which is listed below w.r.t its type. All the necessary details for
5
enclosure design shall be considered.
A Current Transformer (CT)
Current transformer shall be cast resin type, all secondary connections shall be brought out to testing terminal blocks where “wye or delta” connection shall be made before connecting to the relay and metering
1
equipment.
The Basic Insulation level of all the CTs shall be 12/28/75 kV i.e. for 11/22/33 kV System, CT must be wound type and should be installed on the busbar directly, the loading arrangement to be checked/considered
2
while designing the enclosure.

3 The current transformer shall be capable of withstand the stresses arising out of making, breaking and symmetrical short circuit currents for the specified duration. For switchgear may be provided with 1 sec rating

4 Secondary Current, Accuracy Class & Burden of the current transformer shall be: -
4.1 1 Amps, Output on Secondary winding of CT
4.2 Class 0.2S, 5 VA for metering. ISF<10
4.3 Class 5P10 for E/f & other protection relay.
5 Current transformer secondary shall be rated for 1 A for protection and metering 1 A recommended.

6 OEM of CT, CT ratio, accuracy, VA Burden, knee point voltage, magnetizing current, saturation factor, etc., of the CT to be provided shall be compatible with the requirement and as per IEC standard.

All CTs shall be provided with supports independent of busbars / busbar supports. The CTs shall be located in such a way that they can be easily approached for maintenance without necessitating shutdown of adjacent
7
feeders.
8 CTs shall be provided with disconnected type test links in both secondary leads for carrying out current and phase angle measurement.

B Voltage Transformer (PT) - Line Voltage & Bus Voltage

As defined above there are requirements of two types of PT based on the system configuration which is Bus PT and Line PT. Both shall be designed with similar design parameters with different installation
1
arrangements.
Line PT can be fixed on bottom side of incoming breaker which will be used to measure the line voltage before initiating further operation of circuit breakers and equipment's like transformer and other units. Bus PT
2
shall be provided in a separate cubicle form as like circuit breaker with a moveable trolley, which will be used to measure the voltage available on the particular bus.
3 All the PT shall be connected with Line through and rated capacity of HRC Fuse, the PT Fuse monitoring also to be done, a hooter with an indication lamp to be fixed.
4 All Voltage transformers (PT) shall be cast-resin type with an accuracy class of 0.2S for line metering & 0.5S for bus metering and 3P for protection.
5 PTs shall be of the single-phase type. PTs shall be protected on their primary side by HRC fuse and by MCB (with auxiliary contacts) on the secondary sides.
6 The mounting arrangement of PT Shall be done by providing clear front to replace PTs without having to de-energise the main busbars (in case if require)
7 PTs shall be provided with disconnected type test links in both secondary leads for carrying out current and phase angle measurement.
8 Acrylic sheet shall be fixed inside front door of PT Compartments when the Line P is fixed on the circuit breaker

D Core-balanced Current Transformer

1 All the output and input connected with the HT Panel and unit shall have a resin casted "core balanced current transformers" to give the protection against the leakages on the system if any.
2 The current rating and specification shall be selected as per the requirements or the load connected through it.
3 Properly synchronized protection relay must be connected with these current transformer to enable tripping function of the breaker unit to avoid critical damages and breakdown in the system.
4 The healthiness of these relay unit must be connected with "Trip Circuit Monitoring circuit", the breaker should close when there is no fault signal from these unit.

11.8.14.4.12 Voltage Surge Arresters - Metal oxide surge arrestor (12/24/36 kV RMS)
1 Metal oxide surge arrestor without gap Medium voltage surge arresters shall be used in the HT Panel and its Unit to arrest the Overvoltage caused by lightning and switching surges.
2 Similar arrangement shall be provided for the bus bar when there is multiple inputs being combined in the HT Panel and unit.
3 Surge arrester shall be used in each incomer and trafo feeder of MV System, the selection of the arrester to be done by considering the IEC-60099-4
4 Based on the system voltage the LIWV in kV pv, Up in kV pv, and LIWV/Up to be selected.
5 Nominal Dis-charge Current​ of the surge arrester must be ≥10 kA and High Current Impulse With-stand must be 100 kA.

11.8.14.5 Outdoor Switch Yard

11.8.14.5.1 The outdoor switch yard shall be considered on the design based on the project requirements, capacity and requirements of power evacuation mechanism.
All the High Voltage side will be preferred to handle with the modular type compact switchgears as defined in the above section "11.8.14.4". The separate technical specification will be released along with all details
11.8.14.5.2
design requirements when there is specific requirements of outdoor switchyard.
11.8.14.5.3 The following specification requirements are the minimum requirements which must be compliance by the contractor along with specific requirements on the shared technical specifications
11.8.14.5.4 All the components as mentioned on the modular compact type switch gear shall be considered on the outdoor switch yard as well without changes on the material and specification
All the power line units like circuit breaker, measuring unit (CT & PT) shall be installed on a Twin pole system with properly support from civil foundation. All the design parameters w.r.t civil
11.8.14.5.5
infrastructure to be gathered and constructed at site as per actual requirements.
For ensuring additional safety of outdoor switching yard the "Fuse" and a "AB Switch" must be considered on every incoming towards the switchyard. i.e., the final cable termination shall be done after the
11.8.14.5.6
AB Switch
11.8.14.5.7 A IP 65 rated control panel shall be considered for housing all kind of control gears, protection relay and UPS Systems
The AB Switch shall have a provision to ground the moving and fixed contact in case if require. The earthing arrangements in the switch yard shall be designed in a manner by providing proper low
11.8.14.5.8
resistance path to the AB Switch
11.8.14.5.9 The AB Switch shall be installed on a "Twin Pole" or triple pole along with all above mentioned requirements.
Generally the outdoor switch yard will be constructed for the power evacuation arrangement at the end-user premises or in the local sub-station. All these area shall have a similar arrangements to make
11.8.14.5.10
system unique.
While extending the bay from the switchyard, the extension bay arrangement must be done as like the existing arrangement. All the requirements should be captured by the contractor at time of joint visit
11.8.14.5.11
and the system needs to be designed, and constructed along with BECIS requirements as per technical specification documents.
11.8.14.5.12 The arrangements where the circuit breaker will be installed shall be done as per the requirements of circuit breakers OEM along with BECIS requirements
The cable and OHE conductors connection should be done as per regular industry practice and as instructed by the end-user's and BECIS site team, the contractor must prepare and execute the work as
11.8.14.5.13
per actual requirements.
All kind of arrangement whichever will be done in the existing systems premises shall be done as like existing arrangement (i.e., existing bay/feeder). It must be compliance by the contractor with all
11.8.14.5.14
detailed requirements
11.8.14.5.15 The separate requirements of outdoor switchyard, OHE conductors and other arrangement will be issued based on project requirement

11.8.15 High Voltage / Tension Cable

11.8.15.1 The high tension cable shall be used in between the HT terminals of transformer and the circuit breaker panel in the High voltage side
11.8.15.2 Also, the same cable can used till the power evacuation point in case of requirements based on the project requirements.
11.8.15.3 Apart from the following specification, the mentioned requirements on its relevant specification / standards should be considered by the contractor while designing the system
11.8.15.4 The High tension cable shall have a following layers with required specification, the details GTP of cable to be submitted by the contractor for an approval and review purpose of BECIS
11.8.15.5 Sr. No Element Construction / Purpose Material Standards
Stranded compacted circular conductors to carry continuous Compacted stranded - Class 2, Annealed / Plain
1 Conductor IS:8130 / IEC: 60228 / BS EN 60228
load and short circuit current. Copper / Aluminium
Conductors for cables rated above 3.3 kV are screened with
an extruded layer of semiconducting compound. This IS:7098-Part 2 / IEC:60502- Part 2 /
2 Conductor Screen / Shield Extruded Semiconducting Compound
eliminates the chance of electrical discharge at the interface BS:6622 / BS:7835
between conductor and insulation.
Document No. IN-EN-MD-001
Page 30 of 37
Technical Specification Rev. 3_Q4-24

Date 28-Oct-24

General Requirements The insulation is of natural, Cross Linked Polyethylene with

high di-electric strength is extruded over semiconducting IS:7098-Part 2 / IEC: 60502- Part 2 /
3 Insulation XLPE
conductor screening. Thickness of insulation is as per the BS:6622 / BS:7835
relevant tables
Cables rated above 3.3 kV will have a screening consisting
of non metallic part, in combination with a metallic part over
the insulation. The non-metallic part of the screening
consists of either a semiconducting tape applied helically or
a layer of extruded semi-conducting compound or both. The IS:7098-Part 2 / IEC: 60502- Part 2 /
4 Non-metallic Insulation screen Extruded Semiconducting Compound
conductor screening, XLPE insulation and the non-metallic BS:6622 / BS:7835
part of insulation screening are all extruded in one operation
by "TRIPLE EXTRUSION" which eliminates the formation
of micro voids during the extrusion and curing resulting in
longer life of cables.
Bare annealed copper tape / copper wire are applied over IS:7098-Part 2 / IEC: 60502- Part 2 /
5 Metallic Insulation screen Copper Tape
insulation screen to carry fault current. BS:6622 / BS:7835
Insulated cores are laid up together, interstices filled up with
non hygroscopic fillers to make the cable circular. The
6 Laying up Non Hygroscopic PVC / Polypropylene Fiber
phase identify cation of three core cable is done either by
coloured strips / numbered applied on the cores.
The cable cores are provided with a common covering of
IS:7098-Part 2 / IEC: 60502- Part 2 /
7 Inner Sheath extruded PVC/PE sheath or wrapped plastic tapes as per the PVC - Halogen Free
BS:6622 / BS:7835
requirement of the customer.
GI Round wire / Flat wire (Strip) / Double steel tape
armouring is applied over the inner sheath in case of three
GI / Aluminium – Round wire / Flat strip / Double IS:7098-Part 2 / IS:3975 IEC: 60502- Part 2
8 Armour core cables. The direction of lay of armouring is left hand
steel tape / Double Aluminium tape / BS:6622 / BS:7835
side of final layer. For single core cables non magnetic
armouring is applied over the inner sheath.
The cables are provided with an extruded PVC / PE / LSZH
/ FR / FRLS outer sheath over the armour. For Single core
unarmoured cables the outer sheath is extruded over the non PVC FRLS - LSZH - Polyethylene - Halogen IS:7098-Part 2 / IEC: 60502- Part 2 /
9 Outer sheath
magnetic metallic part of insulation screening. Outer sheath Free BS:6622 / BS:7835
is generally of Black colour, but any other colour as per
customer requirement can be provided.

11.8.15.6 Multicore and single core cable shall be considered for the power transmission within the power plant or till the power evacuation. However, the selected cable must be approved by the BECIS
11.8.15.7 Along with the specification, there is limitation of manufacture as well, the contractor should take them on consideration during purchase and designing activities
11.8.15.8 The installation of High Tension cable shall be done with cable tray only where it is exposed to the atmosphere and air. Or the buried installation method can be considered
11.8.15.9 Buried installation of HT Cable shall be done by following the requirements as per the relevant codes and local body regulations w.r.t voltage grade shall be fulfilled
11.8.15.10 While installing the cable tray, the mentioned and required specification on cable trench shall be fulfilled if the cable will be installed in the cable tray within the trench. Refer the section "11.9.11" for requirements on cable trench
11.8.15.11 When these high tension cable will be installed in the raised arrangement i.e., above the FGL, the minimum height w.r.t voltage grade to be followed along with proper workmanship of installation
11.8.15.12 The carrying arrangement of HT cable while under ground routing shall be done with Hume pipe and its defined or required length as per the applicable standards
11.8.15.13 HT Cable crossing below the river, water beds or cannel will not be allowed, the raised structure with cable tray installation always [referred

11.8.15.14 The selection of cable tray shall be done as per the requirements on the project specifics, the Collar height, load bearing capacity and space require for bends shall be considered as a minimum factor while selecting the cable tray size.

11.8.15.15 All bends on the cable tray shall be fabricated at site as per the requirements by following the recommended bending radius of the higher size cable which will be laid
Refer the section "8.12.8" & "8.13.6.3" for the details requirements of installation arrangement of cable tray. (The mentioned specification for LT Cables, the same, or similar arrangements as applicable for HT Installation shall be
11.8.15.16
followed)
11.8.15.17 The UV Resistance cable ties shall be used to fix the cable with cable tray.
The top layer of cable tray should be covered with the metal cover which been made from mild steel along with galvanization coating thickness of 80 microns when the multi layer will be planned. If only single layer considered, it must
11.8.15.18
be a covered cable tray
11.8.16 Single Core Cable
11.8.16.1 Based on the requirements the contractor shall consider the single core cable for the power transmission between the Central inverter and the transformer on LT (Lower Tension) side after taking a proper approval from BECIS
11.8.16.2 All the required specification of AC Cable as mentioned in section "8.13.6" shall be fulfilled by the contract and the same to be taken in consideration
11.8.16.3 Along with selection criteria, the installation of the cable also to be done as per the requirements of BECIS and as recommended by the OEM of cable
11.8.16.4 All kind of termination of single core with the equipment's shall be done as per the requirements of OEM instruction, all these work should be handled by the proper workmanship

11.8.17 Earthing
11.8.17.1 Transformer yard and HT Switch yard (outdoor) shall be earthed properly as per the design and standards requirements
The following size of earthing conductors are preferred to use for ensuring the proper earthing system. (Please Note:- The followings are only for the transformer and Switchyard areas, other PV Plant utilities shall be earther as per the
11.8.17.2
design requirement of BECIS)
11.8.17.3 75 mm x 12 mm Thk, HDG I Earthing conductors shall be used as equipotential busbar - Applicable for Central Inverters, Power Transformer, HT Panel and its unit
11.8.17.4 The earthing grid shall be prepared for entire area of switchyard where to provided earthing provision for all the equipment's which will be installed in the area
The complete arrangement must be covered under the Lightening arrester under level 1 radius of ESE Type with proper earthing arrangement. The Transmission tower, Twin Pole, Outdoor switchyard structural members
11.8.17.5
shall be earthed at bottom and connected with Grid earthing
11.8.17.6 The grid earthing shall be prepared by considering all these equipment's and its rated functioning voltage
11.8.17.7 The earth pit and its arrangement shall be done by ensuring the requirements mentioned on the section "8.14.1".
The structural parts of OHE line transmission line or bay extensions arrangement which is carrying the power conductors shall be equipped with the surge arrester. It shall be selected w.r.t the system voltage and requirements
11.8.17.8
as per relevant standards
11.8.17.9 All the earth pit which will be provided in the transformer and switchyard shall have a test link * TB arrangement to perform the testing at time of requirement
The complete earthing layout, earthing arrangement, LA detailing, equipment earthing, other power line earthing including PV plants equipment shall be mentioned on the earthing layout and submitted for the review and
11.8.17.10
approval purpose of BECIS. Based on approval the contractor need to plan for further executions
11.8.18 Outdoor lighting
11.8.18.1 The peripheral access which will be provided inside the boundary of solar power plants shall be equipped with "25 Watts LED Lights".
11.8.18.2 Also, the Outdoor switchyard and transformer yards must installed with lighting arrangements, the require Lux level for better visual requirements needs to be provided.
11.8.18.3 All these kind of lightning should be mounted don the 4 meters height ISWP, HDG Pole with a proper civil foundation and earthing arrangements as per electrical standard requirements
11.8.18.4 These light pole must be as standalone one with enough arrangement to handle the critical situations, the basic loading calculation to be considered on the design and executions
11.8.18.5 The Power supply unit i.e., a IP 65 rated enclosure with a single pole MCB and rated fuse to be fixed on the pole.
11.8.18.6 2 Core / 5 Core 2.5 Sq.mm Cu, Multi strands Armd cable shall be used for carrying power supply from MLDB (Main lightning distribution Panel ) placed in the control room
11.8.18.7 The earthing arrangement of lighting pole should be done with a maintenance free chemical earthing by ensuring the requirements mentioned on the section "8.14.1".
11.8.18.8 The orientation of outdoor light fixtures & its power source arrangement shall be as per site requirement.

11.8.19 UPS - (Uninterrupted Power Supply)

11.8.19.1 The UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply) unit along with battery back shall be provided for the emergency supply requirements at the plant premises
11.8.19.2 Along with emergency supply the UPS power supply shall be extended to given to the following units,
Control Supply for HT Panel & Its unit,
Control Supply for Central Inverters,
Power Source of Fire deduction system,
11.8.19.3 Control supply to transformer controls (on marshalling box on the trfo)
Plant Monitoring Unit (i.e., SCADA)
LT Panel, control
CCTV System
11.8.19.4 The rating of the UPS shall be designed by considering the power consumption for above listed equipment's.
11.8.19.5 Each devices and unit will have a separate back-up time hence, the contractor must design reliable along with an appreciable battery units
11.8.19.6 All the installation arrangement of these unit including= the battery's system should be done in the control room, the required space requirements shall be considered from initial design
Earthing arrangement for the UPS and its other units shall be done separately it is not recommended to connect with AC or DC Earthing system. All the earthing arrangement shall be done by ensuring the requirements as mentioned in
11.8.19.7
the section "8.14".
11.8.20 Auxiliary Power Supply Unit
11.8.20.1 The complete solar power plant will be require many auxiliary units to make sure the proper functioning of the unit . All the power requirements must be handled and supplied by the auxiliary power supply units
11.8.20.2 Auxiliary power supply unit is includes the Auxiliary Power Transformer, Its Control panels, Aux., Power Distribution Panels and Other DB.
11.8.20.3 All these listed arrangements hall be designed a per the actual requirements by considering all kind of actual scenario at time of operation
11.8.20.4 The Auxiliary Power transformer shall be placed in the transformer yard based upon the type. (Please Note:- the Auxiliary Power Transformer will be require based on the plant capacity)
Document No. IN-EN-MD-001
Page 31 of 37
Technical Specification Rev. 3_Q4-24

Date 28-Oct-24

General Requirements
11.8.20.5 Moreover the aux power consumption will be taken from the end-user the contractor need to take their custody for extending the same from source and proper distribution to the equipment's of solar plant
11.8.20.6 All the designing, cabling and execution in manner shall be done by the contractor
All the critical equipment's like, transformer, HT Panel & its unit, CCTV, SCADA System & Fire Protection system must have provision to connect the direct source from auxiliary supply source and an isolated line through UPS. The
11.8.20.7
system shall be designed in such a way
The separate technical specification along with detailed requirements will be communicated to the contractor when the "Auxiliary Power transformer" will be require based on the project requirement. However, the power distribution
11.8.20.8
system design & execution within the plant from source of end-user will be in the scope of contractor.
11.8.21 Fire Protection
11.8.21.1 Fire deduction and prevention system should be executed by the contractor in the control room, Trafor yard and Open Switchyard (to protect critical equipment's)
11.8.21.2 The complete design and execution of these system will be in the scope of contractors, it shall be designed by fulfilling all the requirements as defined in the relevant standards.
11.8.21.3 Along with design, the execution shall be done by the contractor by completing the BECIS & End user requirements with good engineering and workmanship
All the task including testing & commissioning is in the scope of contractors. They have to share the details design documents along with relevant calculation, BECIS team will review the same based on the approval contractor needs to
11.8.21.4
execute the and commission the system successfully (The comments during engineering review must be compliance by the contractor without deviating any requirements)
Along with fire deduction system, all the electrical equipment's installed in the plant premises including the DC Side String Combiner box, AC Side Combiner Box, Central inverters, Transformer Control Units, and HT panel shall be
11.8.21.5
equipped with AFSS with suitable capacity.
11.8.21.6 The Fire detection system for control room, transformer yard are different requirements which also to be done as designed along with AFSS of particular equipment's
11.9 Civil Infrastructure and Requirements

11.9.1 General Requirements

All foundations shall be of reinforced cement concrete. The design and construction of RCC Structure shall be carried out as per IS 436, all the specific foundation will have a different required grades which will be communicated
11.9.1.1 through the drawing and minimum grade of concrete shall be M15 corresponding to 1:2:4 nominal mix ratio with 12-20 mm coarse aggregate. It shall be designed in accordance with the provisions of the relevant parts of latest revision
of IS 2911 and IS 456
11.9.1.2 Higher grade of concrete than specified above may be used at the discretion of the contractor without any financial implication to the owner

11.9.1.3 For design and construction of steel-concrete composite beams IS:11384 shall be followed

11.9.1.4 The type of foundation system i.e., isolated footing, raft or piling shall be decided based on the load intensity and soil striata

11.9.1.5 For detailing of reinforcement IS 2502 shall be followed, Cold twisted deformed bars (Fe-415 N/Sq.mm) conforming to IS 432 can also be used
11.9.1.6 Two layer of reinforcement (on inner and outer face) shall be provided for wall and slab sections having thickness of 150 mm and above clear cover to reinforcement towards the earth face shall be minimum 40 mm
11.9.1.7 The procedure used for design of the foundations shall be the most critical loading combination of the steel structure and /or equipment and /or superstructure, and other conditions which produce IS codes of foundation design.
All building, sub station, shall be checked for sliding and overturning stability during both construction and operating for various combinations of loads. Factors of safety for these cases shall be as stated in relevant IS Codes or as
11.9.1.8
stipulated elsewhere in the specifications
11.9.1.9 Earth pressure for all underground structure shall be calculated using coefficient of earth pressure at rest, coefficient of active or passive earth pressure (whichever is applicable)

11.9.1.10 Design shall consider any sub-soil water premeasure that may be encountered
All underground concrete structure such as basements, cable trench, foundations for equipment's, water retaining structures etc. shall have plasticizer cum waterproofing cement additive conforming to IS 9103. In addition, the limit on
11.9.1.11
permeability as given in IS 2645 shall also be met.
11.9.1.12 the concrete surface if these structures in contact with earth shall also be provided with two coats of bituminous painting for water /damp proofing

11.9.1.13 the following conditions shall be considered for the design of water tank, pump house, channels, transformer foundation, control room, cable trench and other utensils in the project locations

11.9.1.14 Full water pressure from inside and no earth pressure, ground water pressure and surcharge pressure from outside (applicable only to structures which are liable to be filled with the water or any other liquid)

11.9.1.15 Full earth pressure, surcharge pressure and ground water pressure from outside and no water pressure from insider

11.9.1.16 The design calculations shall be submitted by the contractor showing complete details of piles/pile groups proposed to be used

11.9.1.17 All foundations shall rest below virgin ground level and minimum depth of the foundation below the virgin ground level (minimum one meter below the virgin ground level) shall be maintained
Necessary protection to the foundations if required, shall be provided to take care of any special requirements for aggressive alkaline should, black cotton soil or any other type of soil which is detrimental or harmful to the concrete
11.9.1.18
foundations. RCC Columns shall be provided with rigid connections at the base
11.9.1.19 In case of water leakage in the above structures, leakage repair shall be achieved by the injection method by the contractor

11.9.1.20 Circuit breaker, HT Switchgear, transformer foundations shall be designed for impact loading and shall be strictly in accordance with the manufactures' and BECIS recommendations
Other foundation on switchyards, and other utilities which will be a part of electrical and mechanical structure, plinths of switchyards, plinths of control rooms, shall be minimum 500 mm above finished ground level or as per minimum
11.9.1.21
required safety clearance stipulated in IE Rules
There should be a proper mounting arrangement to the equipment on the top of any civil foundations, the proper co-ordination between the manufacture, BECIS and execution team to be done to achieve the successful implications of
11.9.1.22
any equipment's in the project area
All the design and documents to be submitted for the review of BECIS design team, the minimum requirements, of technical design in civil stream to be mentioned on the drawing to get approval on submission on one go. After getting
11.9.1.23
the proper approval only the contractor need to proceed further on initiation
11.9.1.24 The contractor should comply the requirements raised by the BECIS during the design evaluation
All the material which will be used on the civil construction shall be selected from an approved make as per the BOM issued by the BECIS, in case any proposal with economical along with matched technical requirement it can be
11.9.1.25
used after getting proper approval from BECIS by submitting the documents.
11.9.1.26 There are few additional requirements with respect to its purpose, which to be considered along with above requirements and implemented by the contractor without any deviations from approved terms.

11.9.2 Switchyard

11.9.2.1 The complete switchyard which will be constructed by the contractor in the project location shall be done by complying the requirements asked by the BECIS
The complete "Switch Yard" defines here a switching station which is the main link between the generating plant (i.e. Solar Power Plant) and the transmission system (i.e., Grid) it includes transformer, Circuit Breaker
11.9.2.2
(Indoor/Outdoor), Measuring Unit, Twin pole structure, control panels and other utilities

11.9.2.3 All above mentioned equipment's but not limited to the mentioned shall be installer din the switch yard, the contractor shall provide a proper civil foundation or arrangement to install as per designing within or around the switchyard

11.9.2.4 The complete area of switchyard to be filled with gravels or black stones to avoid formation of vegetation around and in the switchyard area

11.9.2.5 The peripheral of the complete switchyard to be covered with a chain link fencing as per local DISCOM and BECIS Requirements with proper civil foundation & fixed support at every 1500 mm span

11.9.2.6 The flood lighting arrangement to be provided to the switchyard area on a provide on a proper well supported standalone pole or a wall of control room

11.9.3 Transformer Foundations / Yard

11.9.3.1 The transformer foundation / yard to be designed with following arrangement, all the terms related with the foundation design to be followed by the contractor
the transformer location always to be decided in outdoor area, with a proper arrangement of fencing, proper civil foundation (as mentioned below), proper cable routing arrangement, proper provision for doing its equipment's and its
11.9.3.2
utilities installation within the transformer yard.
The transformer can be installed in / under a covered building in case of project requirements. When the transformer is planned for the indoor installation, the roofing, Mansory brick wall, flooring, and cable routing arrangement shall
11.9.3.3
be planned in the good engineering manner by fulling the requirements of BECIS and local DISCOM requirements.
11.9.3.4 The foundation of transformer should be free from vibration of its own or other nearby equipment's, the design and execution shall be done in a manner by ensuring these requirements

11.9.3.5 The foundation to be designed as suitable to the load as declared by the manufactures along with the static load an factor of safety 1.1 to be considered

11.9.3.6 the foundation to be started one meter below from FGL and to be extend above the ground as per the design requirement by considering other particulars
A proper access platform with handrail to be provided for the transformer to have a safe access and inspection during operation. Additionally, there should be cantilever type of extended platform an around the transformer with width of
11.9.3.7
1000 mm
11.9.3.8 All the cantilever supports shall be provided with a handrail in manner to fulfil the EHS requirement (the same will be required if the height of access platform is more than 1200 mm from the FGL).
There should be a rail on top of civil foundation to place /fix the transformers, also the railing arrangement shall be designed in manner to it will be able to give easy movement of the transformer during when require. Stopper
11.9.3.9
arrangement should be considered along with the rail to hold and keep the positioning of transformer
11.9.3.10 The railing arrangement will be used for installing the transformer must be embedded properly with the civil foundation.

11.9.3.11 The levelling of transformer railing to be done at time of costing as it could lead a critical issue while installation other utilities with transformer

11.9.3.12 Apart from the civil foundation of transformer, the area of transformer yard to be constructed by fulfilling the following minimum requirements
There should a requirement of oil sump pit in the transformer yard with internal piping arrangement where the transformer rating is more and equal to 5 MVA and combinations of multiple transformers are installed in one location.
11.9.3.13
(Get the details requirements from BECIS for oil pits & its construction arrangements)
The proper fencing to be done on all four sides of transformer yard with an entry restricted gate. The guidelines and requirements of local DISCOM to be considered.
11.9.3.14
The space around the transformer to be provided as per the requirements to match /fulfil the needs as per local DISCOM and BECIS EHS Requirements

11.9.3.15 The electrical connections with the transformer should be done as per the design given by the manufacture of transformer and BECIS, the necessary civil infrastructure to be considered from the initial design

11.9.3.16 The cable termination chamber to be provided with proper fixing arrangement (i.e., twin pole) if both termination should be done through the cable.

11.9.3.17 The bus duct support to be firmly grouted in the civil foundation at transformer yard if the connection of transformer will be done with bus duct (on LT Side)

11.9.3.18 The twin pole or OHE conductors support arrangements to be fixed at transformer yard with proper installation arrangement when the open termination kind of arrangement planned for termination with transformer at HT Side
Document No. IN-EN-MD-001
Page 32 of 37
Technical Specification Rev. 3_Q4-24

Date 28-Oct-24

General Requirements
11.9.3.19 Twin pole foundation shall be designed for an additional factor of safety of 1.1 for normal/ broken wire conditions and for short circuit condition

11.9.3.20 The top level of cable trench to be raised up to 300 mm from FGL in transformer yard to when the cable trench are ging to be extended in the transformer yard from control
Proper civil foundation and arrangement to be done for the fire fighting equipment's if any will be installer din the transformer area the same will be required and confirmed based on the site and project requirement, hence the
11.9.3.21
contractors are requested to get the confirmation form the BECIS and time of proposal)
11.9.3.22 There should be a proper footing foundation in the yard itself In case if any other utilities panel to be installed.

11.9.3.23 The complete transformer yard to be designed in such a way to provide clear access to do the maintenance activities, & vehicle movement for lifting the equipment's like transformer, circuit breakers and its utilities.

The twin pole and equipment's foundations shall be checked for a factor of safety of 2.2 for normal condition and 1.65 for short circuit condition against sliding, over turning and pull-out. The same factor shall be used as partial safety
11.9.3.24
factor loads in limit state design also
11.9.3.25 Based on the project capacity and requirements there might be a requirements of using multiple transformer, in this case a similar arrangement should be provided for an additional transformer.

11.9.3.26 There should be a proper brick Mansory between the transformer, which to be constructed as per the regulation requirements to act as a insulation barrier at time of critical incident if any during operation

11.9.4 Main Control Room

11.9.4.1 General Requirement

11.9.4.2 The followings are the minimum requirements which to be considered by the contractors while design and execution of the control room and other utility rooms where the electrical panel will be placed

11.9.4.3 A proper control room to be constructed by the contractor in the project premisses to keep all kind of electrical switchgears and other utilities control panels

11.9.4.4 Along with electrical panels, there should be a proper provision for the office with table for operation and maintenance team

11.9.4.5 There are two different type of control room design and execution expected form the contractors they are

11.9.4.5.1 Brick Masonry Roof With RCC Slab

11.9.4.5.2 Pre-Engineered Building With Civil footing foundation

11.9.4.6 Refer the respective sections for further understanding the requirement / specification of BECIS on both type of construction, accordingly the contractor shall proceed further
In the both type of construction, there are no changes on below ground construction which will be similar for both. All the civil works will be taken care for the control shall be done by considering the minimum requirements mentioned
11.9.4.7
in the relevant sections of respective equipment's which will be installed the control room.
The proper design and simulation of complete control room to be submitted by the contractor for the review of BECIS design and engineering team, based on the approval on the submitted design the contractor can go ahead for the
11.9.4.8
execution
11.9.4.9 In case of any further alternation and modification as suggested by the BECIS during design review, that to be incorporated by the contractor and revised design to be submitted for further review and approval
The followings are the minimum requirements which to be considered by the contractors while design and execution of the control room and other utility rooms where the electrical panel will be placed which is irrespective to the type
11.9.4.10
of building. The contractor should ensure and met the following specifications without fail
11.9.4.11 All terms as mentioned in its relevant standards and guidelines issued by the various authority to be complied without fail

11.9.4.12 The complete design, construction and layout of all electrical equipment rooms shall be in complete compliance with the current revision of the National Electric Code (NEC)

11.9.4.13 All electrical equipment rooms shall be lockable/securable such that access is limited to appropriate employees of BECIS
The switch rooms must be large enough to accommodate all electrical equipment components such as medium voltage switchgears, low voltage switchgears and other utilities of PV Plants Also, it can be conveniently accessed for
11.9.4.14
inspection and/or maintenance and can be conveniently removed for repair or replacement. Additionally, there should be a sufficient space for possible future extensions to the switchboards.
11.9.4.15 More important terms in design of electrical switchgear room, there must be an adequate rear access to allow the cabling to be installed and terminated and to allow inspection and removal of rear mounted equipment
Sufficient space at the front of the switchboard is required for complete withdrawal of the circuit-breaker truck. The floor must be designed to include fixings, floor levelling and truck runners as specified by the switchgear
11.9.4.16
manufacturer and also to take into account the effect of the truck wheels when a circuit-breaker is removed and manoeuvred
11.9.4.17 All clearances required by the NEC and recommended by equipment manufacturers shall also be provided.

11.9.4.18 Apart from the electrical switchgear there will be the

11.9.4.19 Side wall space is required for control and alarm junction boxes and miscellaneous equipment such as lighting and small power distribution boards and transformers, telephone junction boxes and fire detection and protection panels

The cable to be laid in dedicated cable racks below the switchgear and passes through holes or slots in the floor onto cable supporting steelwork in the racks located in the trench below the switchgear panels. The positioning of the
11.9.4.20
switchgear and the holes or slots in the floor must take into account the civil design of the building. Care must be taken to avoid positioning the main cable entry over floor beams or cable trench or any other major obstruction

11.9.4.21 The clear height under beams and services of the 33 kV, 11 kV, 6.6 kV and 3.3 kV switch rooms must be adequate to allow arc-Shute removal, using the manufacturer's lifting frame.

11.9.4.22 Brick Masonry Control Room

11.9.4.22.1 Brick Masonry is commonly used for construction of ordinary as well as important buildings in plain areas now-a-days
Bricks for generally masonry work shall be of first class (compressive strength = 75 Kg./cm sq. minimum) well burnt, of uniform size, shape and colour free from crackles, flows or nodules of free lime and unit clear ringing sound
11.9.4.22.2 when struck. Fractured surface shall show uniform texture free from gist, limps, holes, etc. Water absorption after 24 hours immersion shall not exceed 20% by weight. The bricks shall show no effluence after soaking in water and
drying in shade and shall in general conform to the requirements of IS: 1077 – 1992
The mortar shall be prepared by mixing cement and coarse sand in the specified portion as stated in the drawings or as instructed by the BECIS, Water shall be clear, free from organic matters, acids, or soluble salts and other
11.9.4.22.3
deleterious substances in accordance with IS Specifications. Generally, mortars in the proportion 1: 4 (1 cement and 4 coarse sand) shall be used in brick masonry works of superstructure

11.9.4.22.4 All joints between bricks shall be kept uniformly 10 mm thick and shall be fully filled with mortar, All brick shall be laid in English bond with frog on top except for the layer just below D.P.C. and in accordance with IS: 2212 – 1991.

The brick walls shall be truly vertical and all coarse shall be truly horizontal. Masonry shall be cured by keeping it wet for seven days from the date of laying. In dry weather at the end of days work top surface of masonry shall be kept
11.9.4.22.5
by ponding. All brick wall shall be designed as per IS: 1905 – 1987.
Generally, 250-mm. thick brick wall shall be constructed, cement plastered with mortar in the proportion 1: 4 (1 cement and 4 coarse sand). The thickness of cement plaster on the plumbed and unplumbed surfaces of brick wall shall
11.9.4.22.6
be 12 mm. and 18 mm. respectively. Unless otherwise specified in the drawings or instructed by BECIS
For sand and cement plaster, sand and cement in the specified proportion shall be mixed dry on watertight platform and minimum water added to achieve working consistency. Plaster when more than 12 mm. thick, shall be applied in
11.9.4.22.7
two coats – a base coat followed by the finishing coat. The base coat shall be allowed to dry and shrink before applying the second coast of plaster.
11.9.4.22.8 The complete construction work of brickwork shall be done by considering the terms and requirements mentioned in the IS 2212 along with fulfilling the requirements as mentioned in following by the BECIS
In order to ensure uniformity of loading, openings in walls should not be too large and these should be of ‘hole in wall’ type as far as possible; bearings for lintels and bed blocks under beams should be liberal in sizes; heavy
11.9.4.22.9
concentration of loads should be avoided by judicious planning and
11.9.4.22.10 All these "Load bearing brick masonry" shall be constructed and These walls take the load of super structure and transmit it to the ground through foundation

11.9.4.22.11 For use in various situation of brick. Masonry, the brick shall be selected in accordance with Table 1 of IS 2212
Selection of Mortars - Mortars used for brick masonry shall conform generally to IS 2256 : 1981. The selection of mortar will also be gover-ned by the strength required for masonry and reference may be made in IS 1905 : 1987 for
11.9.4.22.12
knowing the suitability of combination of various types of mortars and grad- of bricks for different strengths required for the masonry.
11.9.4.22.13 The thickness of these wall shall be 9 inch or more as per the requirements as per the application of it
The requirements on the electrical side i.e., as per NEC code all kind of clearance and requirements as per NEC to be taken in consideration by the contractor while designing. The complete design of control room should have a proper
11.9.4.22.14
provision for routing of cable, placements of switchgear installation, inverter installation, and space & arrangement for other utilities.
Apart from the space reservation for the equipment's the complete structure should have enough aesthetic view on completion of work, the contractor should plan for the same from initial stage, the required 3D Layout submission
11.9.4.22.15
should be done for review and approval purpose.
11.9.4.22.16 The control room should have a controlled access as per EHS regulation and requirements. Also, there should be a emergency exit by considering emergency evacuation

11.9.4.22.17 There should a rolling shutter or a vent where we can get the equipment's out from the control room for the purpose of repair and service, the way shall be designed in manner to have access with crane and other lifting vehicle

11.9.4.22.18 Access doors of sufficient height and width are provided to allow an assembled circuit-breaker panel to be manhandled into the switch gear room

11.9.4.22.19 The exit door shall be given at multiple location as per the EHS guideline by considering the emergency evacuation plan

11.9.4.22.20 Fire and Smoke detection system to be installed on the main Control room with manual call arrangements as per the local regulation and standard requirements

11.9.4.22.21 Lighting arrangement for the control room to be done by meeting the requirements and having enough LUX level in the room a per the requirements of NEC and BECIS requirement

11.9.4.22.22 The details requirements and further furniture details will be communicated by the BECIS team during the technical evaluation which shall be complied by the contractor as per an approved specifications

11.9.4.23 Pre-Engineered Steel Building

The Pre-Engineered Steel Building can be considered for the Main control room and other utility room in the project location but the selection is subjected to the approval from BECIS which is based on the project capacity. Generally
11.9.4.23.1 the plant capacity which is equal and less than 3 MWP Can be proceeded with Pre-Engineered Steel buildings.
The Capacity more than 3 MWP should be proceeded with the Brick Masonry Control Room with RCC Slabs
11.9.4.23.2 However, there will be the changes on the elevation of the control rooms construction type but the foundation work and below ground level works should be proper civil foundation work.

11.9.4.23.3 When the control is proposed with the Pre-Engineered Steel Building type, the followed minimum requirements should be complied by the contractor without deviating from the requirements of BECIS
The following requirements & Specifications cover the technical requirements for the design, engineering, fabrication, manufacture, transport, Supply, Construction, and Erection / Installation of Complete Structural and Architectural
11.9.4.23.4
Works. The contractor should comply al the requirements and executed.
11.9.4.23.5 The complete construction shall be done by following the below mentioned codes and as per the specifications as mentioned are but not limited to the listed
Sr.
11.9.4.23.6 Codes and Standards
No
1 IS Code Practice for General Construction in Steel IS:800-2007

2 IS Code Practice for Hot rolled sections and plates IS:2062

Document No. IN-EN-MD-001
Page 33 of 37
Technical Specification Rev. 3_Q4-24

Date 28-Oct-24

General Requirements 3 IS Code of Practice for Cold Form IS:801-1975

4 IS Code of Practice for Design Loads Part-3 IS:875-1987

5 IS Code of Practice for Earth Quake Loads Part-1 IS:1893-2002

6 American Welding Society Specification AWS D1.1.98

7 American Institute of steel construction AISC

Metal building manufactures association
8 MBMA
Manual of steel construction, 9th edition The 1996 edition of low rise building system manual
When constructing the control room as a Pre-engineered building the complete structure should be selected as suitable to sustain the hole wind load and other load which will be applicable at project location. Hence, the contractor
11.9.4.23.7
should have taken these parameters in account while proposing the design
The minimum required strength (i.e., Yield & Ultimate Tensile Strength are 345 Mpa & 250 Mpa respectively). 345 Mpa is required for the main member of the building, rest steel section could be 250 Mpa, The mentioned figures are
11.9.4.23.8
only for the initial consideration of contractor, the same will be changed by the BECIS during technical design review as per the project requirements if any.
All the technical information about the grade and details specification of material which will be use don the complete execution shall be mentioned don the drawing which will be submitted by the contractor for the technical review.
11.9.4.23.9
Based on the approval from the BECIS the contractor need to proceed further
The following load should be considered in the calculation
1) Live Load - 0.75kN/m^2 as per IS-875 Part-2
11.9.4.23.10 2) Dead Load - min. 0.15kN/m^2
3) Earthquake load - As per IS 1893 (Part-1) – 2002.Importance Factor & Response reduction as per IS 1893 Part IV
4) Wind Load - as per IS 875 Part 3, 1987
11.9.4.23.11 Design of all structures shall also consider any other relevant stresses imparted to the structure due to variation in daily and seasonal temperature, water label, erection and maintenance loads, creep shrinkage etc

11.9.4.23.12 Wind and seismic forces shall not be considered to act simultaneously

11.9.4.23.13 Individual members of the frame shall be designed for the worst combination of forces such as bending moment, axial force, shear force, torsion etc.

11.9.4.23.14 Deflection will not be allowed beyond the limits as specified in the applicable standards. It is applicable to all kind of structural works which will be involved on these complete construction

11.9.4.23.15 Complete structural design and construction drawings shall get reviewed by BECIS / Consultant in detail before taking up any fabrication / manufacturing activity.

11.9.4.23.16 For all structures, requisite number of prints of design calculation and working drawing shall be sent to BECIS / Consultant for approval and site for construction.

11.9.4.23.17 Surface Preparation of structural steel to be painted shall be shot blasted as per SAE 2.5. The erection of steel work shall be in accordance with Bureau of Indian Standard Specifications Nos. IS-800 and IS - 816

11.9.4.23.18 Painting for structural members shall be one or more coat of Red Oxide primer and 2 or more coats of Synthetic Enamel Paint of approved brand having thickness of 90-100 micron DFT at site

11.9.4.23.19 All the material to be selected as per the approved design and with an approved specification

11.9.4.23.20 The proper QAP to be submitted and based on the inspection the material to be supplied at site and the complete execution work to be done under / in direction and supervision of BECIS team.
The requirements on the electrical side i.e., as per NEC code all kind of clearance and requirements as per NEC to be taken in consideration by the contractor while designing. The complete design of control room should have a proper
11.9.4.23.21
provision for routing of cable, placements of switchgear installation, inverter installation, and space & arrangement for other utilities.
Apart from the space reservation for the equipment's the complete structure should have enough aesthetic view on completion of work, the contractor should plan for the same from initial stage, the required 3D Layout submission
11.9.4.23.22
should be done for review and approval purpose.
11.9.4.23.23 The control room should have a controlled access as per EHS regulation and requirements. Also, there should be a emergency exit by considering emergency evacuation

11.9.4.23.24 There should a rolling shutter or a vent where the equipment's can be shifted out from the control room for the purpose of repair and service, the way shall be designed in manner to have access with crane and other lifting vehicle

11.9.4.23.25 Lighting arrangement for the control room to be done by meeting the requirements and having enough LUX level in the room a per the requirements of NEC and BECIS requirement

11.9.4.23.26 The flooring in the control room to be finished as per the requirements of the equipment's placed, there should be proper arrangement in that

11.9.5 Transformer Rooms

11.9.5.1 Whenever possible, Main Transformers shall be located outside of the building.
Areas that house heat producing equipment such as transformers shall be provided with sufficient outdoor air ventilation or mechanical cooling to prevent overheating. When outdoor air is used to ventilate/cool any electrical room it
11.9.5.2
shall be filtered prior to being introduced into the room. When outdoor air is used to ventilate/cool a transformer room, a minimum of 4 CFM of outdoor air shall be provided for each KVA of rated transformer capacity
Any space that is sensitive to noise and/or vibration generating equipment electromagnetic “noise” shall not be located adjacent to (including above and below) an electrical equipment room that houses this type of equipment. Any
11.9.5.3
space that is sensitive to audible and/or electromagnetic “noise” shall not be located adjacent to (including above and below) a transformer room
11.9.5.4 A concrete housekeeping pad shall be provided for each piece of floor mounted electrical equipment.
Electrical rooms shall only be used to house electrical equipment/systems with the exception of non-electrical equipment/systems that serve the electrical room (e.g. ductwork that provides ventilation for a transformer room).
11.9.5.5
Equipment and/or systems that serve other purposes shall not be located within or be allowed to pass through these spaces. This includes ductwork, hydronic heating/cooling piping, plumbing systems, roof drainage systems, etc
11.9.5.6 An approved eyewash and safety shower shall be installed at each location where hazardous chemicals are stored or handled (e.g. battery storage areas)
• Materials for Plain cement concrete type C-1 (1:3:6) using 20 mm graded stone aggregate as in copying/benching etc including weathering slightly rounded or chamfered angles and throating as directed including necessary form
11.9.5.7
work and finished even and smooth without using extra cement complete all as specified and directed in relevant IS code.
11.9.5.8 • Material for reinforced cement concrete M 25 ( Design Mix) (20 mm graded aggregate) in foundation Inc. Rafts, footings foundation beam plinth beams bases of columns etc and mass concrete

11.9.5.9 • Form work to sides of pilers, posts, struts, piers, columns and stanchions and similar work square, rectangular or polygonal etc rough fished surfaces of concrete flat complete all as specified and directed in relevant IS code
• S&F Mild steel TMT bars 10mm dia and over, cut to length, bent to shape required including cranking, bending, spirally for hooping for columns hooking ends and binding with end including ,ild steel wire (annealed) specified and
11.9.5.10
directed in relevant IS code.
11.9.5.11 • Material for Rendering 15 mm thick on fair faces of bricks work or concrete surfaces in CM 1:6 finished even and smooth without using extra cement complete all as specified and directed in relevant IS code.

11.9.5.12 • Material for Preparation of plastered or unplaster new surfaces of walls and applying two coats of cement base paint over a coat of primer as per manufacturer instructions complete all as specified and directed in relevant IS code.

11.9.6 Module Mounting Structure (MMS)

The PV modules shall be mounted on fixed metallic structures or axile metallic structures with adequate strength and appropriate design, which can withstand load of modules and high wind velocities up to defined / required wind
11.9.6.1
speed as per BECIS. The support structure used in the power plants will be hot dip Galvanized Iron (G.I). The “Mounting Structure” should have the following features:
a. The modules support structure shall be Mild Steel / hot dipped Galvanized (at least 120 micron) Iron for holding the PV modules.
b. MMS structure shall be analysis & design with relevant IS code.
c. All nuts and bolts should be made of good quality Stainless Steel by fulfilling the requirement mentioned in the section 8.4
11.9.6.2
d. The structure should be designed to allow easy replacement of any module.
e. The minimum clearance of the lowest part of the module and the developed ground level shall not be less than 500 mm.
f. Contractor shall specify installation details of the PV modules and the support structures with appropriate designs and drawings. The work shall be carried out as per the designs approved by the procuring entity.
11.9.6.3 The following minimum terms mentioned below shall be fulfilled & considered by the contractor while designing & execution of the MMS (i.e., Module Mounting Structure) for the solar plant
Type and arrangement of MMS will differ to the project scale and the specific requirements, the contract to get clear update and details about the requirement of MMS for the particular project before initiate he project activities
11.9.6.4
including the survey at project location
11.9.6.5 The contractor should take complete responsibility of conducting all kind of survey and investigation at the project location including the soil investigation and Hydrology Analysis
11.9.6.6 All the survey and analysis should be done as per relevant IS code and the requirement of BECIS
11.9.6.7 These following are the minimum requirements which to be considered while designing the MMS and the utilities which will be the part of solar power plant

11.9.6.8 The Module Mounting structure should be analyse & designed to withstand the all applicable Dead load, live load, wind speed (as per the project location with historical data) and earthquake load as per all applicable IS code.

11.9.6.9 Mounting structure should not accumulate or hold water during rainy season as well on other seasons.
11.9.6.10 Structure should be designed considering clamping zone recommended by module OEM

Following documents should be submitted by EPC for review and approval purpose,

1. Structure GA with each component thickness, dimensions & BOM

2. Load calculation sheet
3. STAAD/FEA Software files
4. PDF report of STAAD/FEA report
5. Connection design report
11.9.6.11
6. Datasheet of Rivets, fasteners and other BOS of MMS & its utilities .
7. Soil investigation report
8. Wind load Calculation for the project location
9. Ground contour layout along with marking of drainage water flow direction.
10. Foundation design and calculation
11. Material test report from manufacturer/vendor with details mechanical strength of material.
12. Hydrology Analysis Report

11.9.6.12 MMS material should be hot dip galvanized with 80 micron galvanisation thickness. all members of the MMS to be selected as per the requirement and as per the requirement of design calculation.
Document No. IN-EN-MD-001
Page 34 of 37
Technical Specification Rev. 3_Q4-24

Date 28-Oct-24

General Requirements
11.9.6.13 The method of fixing and type of the civil foundation to be done as per the design calculation and the layout requirement, However, the above mentioned documents to be submitted for the review and approval purpose of BECIS.

11.9.6.14 The civil foundation to be casted properly as per the design. Approved make of cement, steel to be used. RMC can be considered but the required document has to be submitted for the review and approval purpose of BECIS Team.

Before casting of civil foundation, the following test to be performed, The mixing ratio of the concrete should be done/followed as per the approval given by the BECIS.

1. River sand, Fine aggregate & coarse aggregate quarry test report is required. Rebar, cement and any admixture manufacturer/vendor lab test
report.
2. Concrete mix design report as per the material test report and grade of material.
11.9.6.15
3. Cube Test at Lab as per mix design & grade of material.
4. Concrete density test on lab as per mix design & grade of material.
5. Slum Test at site

The result of all test should meet the requirements as per the design, else the rework to be carried out until get match the requirement. Meeting required surface finish, all quality requirements & strength will be the scope of EPC.

11.9.6.16 All the executional work need to be initiated at site after getting proper approval on the design submitted for review. Also, each MMS material need to be inspected by BECIS QC team before getting dispatched from fabrication shop.

11.9.6.17 The shape of the foundation is important, repair work on the concreate to be done if required, Water proof paint to be applied on the civil foundation, colour code to be used as suggested by M/s BECIS.
11.9.6.18 The compliance raised by BECIS QC team during Pre-Dispatch inspection must be compliance before initiating project work or handing over.
After successful installation of MMS on RCC roof and Metal Roofs, a Water leakage test need to be conducted to ensure there are no damages occurred after execution of Solar System on Roof Top Area. Also, an acceptance certificate
11.9.6.19
shall be taken from end-user. And the same to be submitted along with HOTO documents.
The Marking shall be done on the MMS, for the identification of the table, during the period of O&M, Also the same to be reflected in as-built drawing. The marking is including for the G I Roof installation. Area marking to be done by
11.9.6.20
using proper arrangement as suggested by BECIS.
11.9.6.21 The MMS of the project shall be changed a per the project scale and requirements
11.9.6.22 Depending upon the project scale and the specific requirements the MMS shall should be designed by considering the single axis trackers or seasonal arrangement.

Typical specifications of Tracker system components which to be considered while designing of trackers system.

Horizontal single axis tracker(HSAT) with all hardware SS316/SS304 fasteners,150kmph,80/120Micron Hot dip galvanized finish/Stainless steel finish
11.9.6.23 Tracking range 120°(+/ - 60°),with safety stowing & torsional limiter.
Drive system: One slew gear,24V DC motor & self powered controller, with dedicated solar panel row.
System voltage:1000V or 1500V
Compliance : UL2703 (Grounding /bonding), Structural design ASCE7-10, Tracker UL3703.

11.9.6.24 For MMS and its utilities shall have a pile foundation. Types of pile foundation should be decided after soil study and technical analysis.
11.9.6.25 Contractor need to submit the basis of pile foundation. Analysis and design of the pile foundation shall be as per relevant IS code and as per soil study. Minimum grade of concrete shall be M25 & for steel FE415
11.9.6.26 Construction and execution of civil foundation of MMS & its utilities shall be done as per relevant IS code.

11.9.7 Boundary Wall

Complete project utilities including the sensor stations, Switchyard, Trafo yard, Inverter station, MCS system, Control room, Watch tower and other non-listed asset which is the part of solar power plant and owned by BECIS to be
11.9.7.1
covered in the boundary wall.
The boundary wall to be constructed in the area assigned to the contractors where the solar power to be developed and constructed also there are recommended type of boundary wall which will differ on the scale of project hence, it is
11.9.7.2
strongly the recommended to get cleared the required type of boundary wall. The required types are Boundary wall shall be masonry wall, RCC or chain link fencing. It shall be design as per relevant IS code.
However the elevation will differ to the project scale and the particular requirements but the foundation of any kind of boundary wall shall be done with proper civil foundation & firmly support to the wall to withstand all upcoming
11.9.7.3
forces. Foundation design shall be as per relevant IS standard code. Grade of steel shall be FE500 and concrete shall be M25.
These are the minimum requirement which to be fulfilled while construction, In case if the boundary wall will be masonry / RCC, the wall shall be well plaster inside and outside as well.
11.9.7.4
While the case with chain link fencing, the complete steel which will be used on the boundary wall shall be HDG with 80 microns as a minimum thickness.
11.9.8 Roads (W.B.M, Paver block, RCC and bituminous)
The contractors need to develop Approach roads, it should be suitable to carry out safe and easy transportation of equipment and material to and from project site. The road should provide easy and fast approach to each location of the
11.9.8.1
plant.
These roads are to be designed optimally to carry the crane load with all necessary chambers, gradients, super elevation, and radius of curvatures for the easy movement of cranes, trucks and public transport. Roads are to be of
11.9.8.2
sufficient width (minimum 3.75m) with 0.5m wide well compacted shoulders on each side.
11.9.8.3 The road must be well compacted and should be in line with the relevant IS standards and the MORTH specifications, with latest amendment.
All approach and internal road shall be Bituminous Road with proper base development. Pathways would be either of concrete or brick soling with PCC of adequate thickness except for those on the Canal top, which are to be
11.9.8.4
fabricated with chequered plate of adequate thickness with railings on one side, to prevent the maintenance staff from falling down.
11.9.8.5 Also, all cable crossings and other crossings shall be provided with GI/ Hume pipes of requisite thickness and diameter
11.9.8.6 Apart from the approach road in the project location, the contractors should extend the roads till the existing road of end-user plant if any.
11.9.8.7 The road shall be design from following type, it will be declared by the BECIS at time tendering and furthermore discussion which will be held in manner to designing
a Water Bound Macadam Road
b Interlocking Concrete Block Pavement Road
c Roller compacted concrete Road
d Bituminous Road
11.9.8.8 All above these road should be constricted on the roller compacted road, where we can achieve the maximum lifetime for the project lifespan
All the design data and detailed tentative GA must have been submitted along with tendering document for better clarity and information of the review team. The final call will be taken by the BECIS on the type and construction method
11.9.8.9
and layout of the road & its arrangements.
11.9.8.10 These followings are the minimum requirements which to be considered while designing the road and its relevant arrangement in the project location

a Design shall be as per relevant IS / IRC and Ministry of Road Transport and Highways (MORT&H) Specification (Rev./Latest)
Rolling and consolidation formation of surface of road in cutting/filling with power road roller exc 8 to 12 Tonne including filling depression which occur during the rolling complete all as specified and directed in
b
IS/IRC/Morth standard.
Materials for 200 mm thick (compacted thickness) Granular sub base of grade l as per table 400-1 of MORT&H IRC specification laid with mechanical pavers, rolled and completed to required gradient and camber
c
with 8 to 10 tonne power roller and vibratory roller complete as per MORT&H specification clause-401 including all tools and plant and managing diversion all as specified and as directed.
Materials for 150mm thick (compacted thickness) WBM in two layer of 75 mm thick each layer, with coarse aggregate of granite, trap stone or basalt grading 2(63 mm to 40 mm) grading 2 (63 mm to 40 mm)
d
spread, rolled and consolidated with 8 to 12 Tonne capacity power roller to required gradient and camber complete all as specified and directed in IS/IRC/Morth standard.
Materials for preparing surfaces by brushing with wire brushes for removing caked mud etc, sweeping with brooms and finally cleaned the WMM surface with power compressor to remove all loose dirt from surface
e
and applying a tack coat of paving bitumen VG 10 @ 10kg/10sqm complete all as specified and directed in IS/IRC/Morth standard.
Materials for Bituminous premixed semi dense asphaltic concrete 40 mm thick (consolidated thickness) with 5% binder content by weight of total mix using bitumen VG-30 laid, rolled and completed to required
f
gradient and camber with 8 to 10 tonne capacity power roller by using mechanical paver complete all as specified and directed in IS/IRC/Morth standard.
Materials for Hardcore of gauge not exceeding 63 mm of broken stone or boulder , deposited, spread and levelled in layers not exceeding 15cm thick, watered and rammed to a true surface complete all as specified
g
and directed in IS/IRC/Morth standard.
h Materials Precast cement concrete kerb stone using PCC 1:2:4 type B1 with chamfered edge set in cement mortar (1:6) complete all as specified and directed in IS/IRC/Morth standard.
i Materials for PCC 1:4:8 type D-2 (using 40 mm graded stone aggregate) as in foundations, filling and mass concrete etc. Complete all as specified and directed in IS/IRC/Morth standard.
j Materials for brick work with fly ash bricks, straight or curved on plan exc 6m radius, built in CM (1:6) all as specified and directed in IS/IRC/Morth standard.
Materials for factory made Machine pressed precast concrete interlocking paver block any shape and size confirming to IS 15658*2006 of 80 mm thickness M-40 Grade with grey cement & pigment complete all as
k
specified and directed. Note-Dry Sand (Stone dust) cushioning shall be measured & paid separately.
11.9.9 Drains & Pipe culvert
As required for the project location, the water draining system and the Pipe culvert need to be designed and constructed by the contractor with proper guidelines and requirements mentioned on the relevant specification and
11.9.9.1
requirement. Of BECIS
11.9.9.2 The layout shall be planned and executed in such a way by providing the proper arrangement for the water draining. There should not be any area in and surrounding the project location where the water will be accumulated.
11.9.9.3 Flow of water study should be done at time of designing the draining system and the slope should be maintained as per the natural flow of water in the project location
11.9.9.4 All the design of drainage system shall be done as per the relevant IS /IRC and MORT&H specification (i.e. Rev. Latest)
11.9.9.5 The following minimum requirement of BECIS should be followed along with the terms mentioned in the above mentioned specified (i.e. IS // IRC & MORT&H)
11.9.9.6 Also, the proper provision should be provided to the drain and culvert when there is crossing with the internal / branching road in the project location.
The starting and the ending point of the drain and culvert system shall be designed and extended till its original point which might be located out of project location or in the end-user premises . The contractor should consider in their
11.9.9.7
scope of execution.
11.9.9.8 Drain
11.9.9.8.1 The storm water drainage shall be planned to ensure zero water stagnation in the plant. site conditions. The drains outfall must be connected to the nearest drain outside the plant premises.
It is advised that the plant be designed keeping the natural flow of water to the nearest exit point. The contractor is to provide RCC Hume pipe at the crossing of road and drains and at required locations, to facilitate safe, smooth and
11.9.9.8.2
easy crossing of cables.
The peripheral drain shall be of brick pitching which should be backed up by cement mortar bed and all joints are to be filled up with cement mortar in the proportion, cement : mortar =1:4, with due plastering. All other internal drains
11.9.9.8.3 which are on the side of roads, pathways to inverter room, control room, switchyards are to be done by excavating the drain of required size and with required trapezoidal section, and lining the same with, brick with cement mortar on
the two sides with- base consisting of plain cement concrete .
Appropriate slopes shall be maintained to prevent water logging at the site. The contractor shall do the needful to drain the rain water out of the premises by providing necessary gradients and storm water drains made out of brick
11.9.9.8.4
masonry with precast grating, etc. No impounding of water should be allowed in the plant area.
Document No. IN-EN-MD-001
Page 35 of 37
Technical Specification Rev. 3_Q4-24

Date 28-Oct-24

General Requirements
11.9.9.8.5 Drainage layout with detail drainage work is to be submitted with Detailed Design Report to BECIS for approval.
11.9.9.8.6 Additional to above mentioned specification and details, the below details to be taken on the consideration by the contractor while designing the drainage arrangement
a Design shall be as per relevant IS/IRC and morth specification
b Materials for PCC (1:4:8) type D2 using 40 mm graded stone aggregate as in foundation filling and mass concrete complete all as specified and directed in IS standard.
c Materials for old size brick work in CM 1:6 using fly ash bricks, straight or curved on plan exc 6 m mean radius complete all as specified and directed in IS standard.
d Materials for old size brick work in CM 1:6 using fly ash bricks, straight or curved on plan exc 6 m mean radius complete all as specified and directed in IS standard.
e Materials M&L for Rendering 10 mm thick on fair faces of brick work for concrete surfaces in CM 1:4 finished even and smooth without using extra cement complete all as specified and directed in IS standard.
f The real site condition also to be considered while designing which has to be done the contractor.

11.9.9.8.7 Pipe Culvert

a Design shall be as per relevant IS/IRC and morth specification
b Materials for plain cement concrete, type B-1 (1:2:4) using 20 mm graded stone aggregates as in surface channel drains, finished to require shape, complete all as specified standards.
All complete civil work on pipe culvert system should be done as specified and directed in IS standard which is including form work to sides of pilers, posts, struts, piers, columns and stanchion, shape of surface
c
finishing
d Materials for PCC 1:4:8 type D-2 (using 40 mm graded stone aggregate) as in foundations, filling and mass concrete etc. Complete all as specified and directed in IS/IRC/Morth standard.
e Materials for reinforced cement concrete Pipes 600 mm dia, class NP-3 laid in trenches etc and jointed with cement joint complete all as specified and directed in IS standard.
f Materials reinforced cement concrete Pipes 300 mm dia, class NP-3 laid in trenches etc and jointed with cement join complete all as specified and directed in IS standard

11.9.10 Inverter station foundation

11.9.11 11.9.10.1 The inverters one among from the critical equipment's of solar power plant in the larger scale of execution
11.9.10.2 The type of inverter will changes to the project requirement and scale of execution. The contractor should get detail requirement of inverters and its requirements during the discussion.
11.9.10.3 Along with the type of inverter the station (i.e., indoor & outdoor) where the inverters will be installed also depends on the project scale and the specific requirements if any
11.9.10.4 These are the minimum requirement about the inverter stations (including type of inverter and installation location) which to be fulfilled while designing, and execution

11.9.10.5 String Inverter

11.9.10.6 The string inverters shall be considered for the project in direction to the BECIS as per the project requirements if any
11.9.10.7 While designing of these inverter the contractor need to consider the requirement mentioned in section 8.22 to understand the requirement of BECIS against its installation arrangement.
11.9.10.8 Also, the recommendation by the OEM to be followed without fail to get the proper operational warranty of theses inverters and its relevant accessories if any.
11.9.10.9 As derived above, the type of these inverter shall be changed the as per the project requirement, however it is the scope of contractor to match the solar plant's voltage with voltage of power evacuation points
To match the voltage the contractor can use the following sub-accessories in the plant which suppose to comply all technical requirement as per listed below or in its applicable section on this complete technical
11.9.10.10
specification but not limited to the mentioned.
11.9.10.11 In the case of string inverter the power evacuation shall be done by using Combiner panel, power transformer and control gears & switchgears on High voltage side in case if require as per methodology
It is in the scope of contractor to select, design and execute all system as per the project requirement, the requirements of BECIS is listed in this specification in its relevant specification which to be followed by the
11.9.10.12
contractor without fail and need to ensure the proper approval from BECIS before proceeding further stage after LOI.
11.9.10.6 Central Inverter
The central inverter shall be selected as suitable to install in indoor and outdoor atmosphere as well. There are few minimum requirements on its installation arrangement which have been listed below which to be
11.9.10.6.1
complied by the contractor while preparing but not limited to the mentioned.
11.9.10.6.2 In both case i.e., indoor or outdoor the inverter to be installed on a well constructed civil foundation as per BECIS requirements
11.9.10.6.3 Refer the following detailed requirement on inverters installation based on its location preference
11.9.10.6.4 The Civil foundation of central inverter shall be designed in form a to transfer the equipment's loads to ground safely without affecting the other utilities if any
11.9.10.6.5 The details technical calculation of these foundation to be done and submitted for review of BEICIS, after approval on the same further proceeding need to be initiated
11.9.10.6.6 OEM and BECIS requirements shall be considered along with the general requirements, as specific in the relevant codes while designing the
11.9.10.6.7 All kind of civil footing foundation which will be used for inverter foundation must fulfil the requirement mentioned in the standard IS 456: 2000
Footings shall be designed to sustain the applied loads, moments and forces and the induced reactions and to ensure that any settlement which may occur shall be as uniform as possible and the safe bearing capacity of
11.9.10.6.8
soil is not exceeded
Generally the footing foundation are preferred type to install the inverter, in case due to load bearing capacity of soil on particular project site the another method should be followed (i.e., Pile foundation, the
11.9.10.6.9
specification of these will be shared separately)
11.9.10.6.10 However, the contractor should do the survey which in including the soil test, based on the result from soil test the type of foundation need to be decided and executed
11.9.10.6.11 Along with the type of foundation, there technical design parameters need to be followed during engineering design.
11.9.10.6.12 The design parameters includes the wind load, soil test parameters at the project location. Additional utilities load should be considered along with the load parameters which will be used for calculation
11.9.10.6.13 For both type of civil foundation, the ground preparation needs to be done as per the requirements at the project location to increase the bearing capacity
11.9.10.6.14 Ground preparation techniques can include the following settlement periods, vibro-compaction, jet grouting, stone columns, dynamic compaction, and wick drains, among others
11.9.10.6.15 Followed by the ground preparation, the PCC and RCC foundation to be cast for the inverters as per approved design and fulfilling minimum requirements as per relevant standards
11.9.10.6.16 The specification and manufactures of all the materials which will be used on civil foundation shall be selected/used as approved by BECIS
11.9.10.6.17 Few Design detail requirements abouts on Civil foundation
Materials for Plain cement concrete type C-1 (1:3:6) using 20 mm graded stone aggregate as in copying/benching etc including weathering slightly rounded or chamfered angles and throating as directed
a
including necessary form work and finished even and smooth without using extra cement complete all as specified and directed in IS standard.
Material for reinforced cement concrete M 25 ( Design Mix) (20 mm graded aggregate) in foundation Inc. Rafts, footings foundation beam plinth beams bases of columns etc and mass concrete in IS
b
standard in relevant IS code.
Form work to sides of pillars, posts, struts, piers, columns and stanchions and similar work square, rectangular or polygonal etc rough fished surfaces of concrete flat complete all as specified and directed in
c
relevant IS code.
S&F Mild steel TMT bars 10mm dia and over, cut to length, bent to shape required including cranking, bending, spirally for hooping for columns hooking ends and binding with end including ,ild steel wire
d
(annealed) specified and directed in relevant IS code.
e M&L for Rendering 15 mm thick on fair faces of bricks work or concrete surfaces in CM 1:6 finished even and smooth without using extra cement complete all as specified and directed.
M&L for Preparation of plastered or unplaster new surfaces of walls and applying two coats of cement base paint over a coat of primer as per manufacturer instructions complete all as specified and directed
f
in relevant IS code.
11.9.10.6.18 Elevation of the civil foundation to be extended above the High Flood Level (HFL), the level should be maintained by considering the historical data of past 50 years.
11.9.10.6.19 There should be the proper access way around the inverter unit for having easy maintenance
11.9.10.6.20 Also, the proper arrangement should be done for the cable routing which will be coming from the field and the cable which will start from inverter towards the power evacuation system and arrangement
11.9.10.6.21 The access arrangement shall be provided in form of cantilever support from the main foundation where the inverter got placed
11.9.10.6.22 The foundation should have a provision for routing the AC and DC Cable below the inverter unit, there should be sufficient arrangement for routing the same

11.9.11 Cable Trench

Cable trenching is a method of laying cables into the ground by digging trenches, there are few set of requirement by BECIS which to be fulfilled when these of arrangement will be require and used in the plant premisses for carrying
11.9.11.1
out the cable (including DC, AC and communication)
11.9.11.2 Open trench cable laying is a popular method for a range of cable installation, but the method trench construction to be changed as per project requirements.
11.9.11.3 Along with the open trench, there is an another preferred types which is Brick Masonry & RCC trenching method which is highly preferrable when the cable routing to be done in the indoor condition or below an equipment's.
When installing underground cables, an important aspect to consider is the depth and width of the trench. To successfully bury a cable, the trench must be dug and prepared properly. The trench must be of adequate size for the cables
11.9.11.4
and ducting
11.9.11.5 Refer the below mentioned an minimum requirement of the trench construction and execution with respect to its type. All the mentioned terms to be fulfilled by the contractor without fail

11.9.11.6 Under Ground Open Trench / Buried Cables

As defined the AC , DC and communication cables can be laid in the open underground trenches by maintain the requirements as per its relevant standards (for example, the All Cable should be installed by following
11.9.11.6.1
the requirement as mentioned in the IS 1255)
11.9.11.6.2 Cables are to be laid in neat lines and at suitable levels, Their depth below ground level will depend upon the voltage associated with the cables but in all cases the excavation must provide a clear trench
11.9.11.6.3 The size of cable trench to be decided by considering number of cable which will be laid in the trench.
11.9.11.6.4 Sand filling below , around and above the cable will always required and protection covers or tiles/bricks of the cable trenches shall be marked with the suitable posts as required by relevant of this specifications
11.9.11.6.5 While backfilling the cable in the trench, grouping factor and other required parameters to be followed by the contractors to avoid technical issues at later stage
An other factor on the trench sizes is depth which to be made as directed in the standard accordingly voltage grades. Additional protection arrangement shall be provided for the cable which will be laid in the trench
11.9.11.6.6
where the maximum depth not achieved die to the technical and practical reason at the project location

11.9.11.6.7 For identification and information purpose, the route marking on the entire routing to be done by using a "Cable Route Marker" with voltage grade, direction and type of cable (i.e., AC. DC. LT. HT or communication)

11.9.11.6.8 Deviation like changes on the depth, fulfilling minimum requirements as mentioned above or mentioned in the relevant standard will not be accepted
Document No. IN-EN-MD-001
Page 36 of 37
Technical Specification Rev. 3_Q4-24

Date 28-Oct-24

General Requirements
11.9.11.7 Brick Masonry Trench
11.9.11.7.1 The cable trenches should be primarily of Brick masonry supported with RCC Pillars (250 x 250 mm) at an interval of 1800 mm over RCC Base
In each pillar, 2 no's of MS flats shall be suitably embedded to hold cable trays. The supporting frame of cable trays shall be designed properly by considering active and dead loads which will be applied on it while
11.9.11.7.2
execution as well during operation
11.9.11.7.3 If the design permits the small equipment's can be placed over the brick masonry trench with providing enough arrangement
The Brick wall of trench to be constructed on the RCC bed (Along the length) also the top of trench should be a RCC beam with embedded MS flats or angle as a edge prevention and provision support to place the
11.9.11.7.4
equipment's over the trench
11.9.11.7.5 The same kind of trench can be used inside the control room for routing the cable below the inverters, HT Switchgear Panel, UPS and control units.
11.9.11.7.6 While the cable trench extended in the control room, it should be covered with an RCC Covers or an MS Painted Punched Chequered Plate with proper load bearing supports.
11.9.11.7.7 The cable trench shall be designed as suitable to carry the self weight of top covers plus concentrated loads of 400 kg / sq.m also, it should capable to handle 2 tonnes per sq.m surge load
11.9.11.7.8 Additional the equipment weights which will be placed over the trench, and cable tray racks weight with cable and dead loads

11.9.11.8 RCC Trench

A method of cable trenching is RCC Trench, these type of trench are preferred to use in the plant where there are more possibilities of water seepage or the project near costal area. As the water seepage in the trench
11.9.11.8.1
will lead to a critical damages & maintenance, hence the contractor should consider the these requirements at initial stage.
11.9.11.8.2 The same trench can be extended to till control room for routing the cables below the equipment's like inverters HT Switchgears, up's and other utilities if any
All the live and dead loads to be considered in the design calculation accordingly the design to be done. For review and approval purpose all the calculation to be submitted. The minimum required design parameters
11.9.11.8.3
"Trench shall be designed as suitable to carry the self weight of top covers plus concentrated loads of 400 kg / sq.m also, it should capable to handle 2 tonnes per sq.m surge load"
11.9.11.8.4 Additional the equipment weights which will be placed over the trench, and cable tray racks weight with cable and dead loads
Complete trench to be covered with the RCC Covers, While the cable trench extended in the control room, it should be covered with an RCC Covers or an MS Painted Punched Chequered Plate with proper load
11.9.11.8.5
bearing supports.
Direct cable laying in the RCC trench will not be allowed as the outer surface of cable might be damaged during installation hence it is should be laid on the cable tray which will be well support from side walls of cable
11.9.11.8.6
trench
11.9.11.8.7 There should be 300 mm distance between tier 1 and tier 2 on cable racks in case if multi tire installation to be require
The width of cable trench to be decided as per the cable tray size and specification which will be require for maintenance activities (Please Note:- 1200 mm is Minimum required width of trench where the 600 mm
11.9.11.8.8
width tray can be installed and leftover space can be used for manpower and cable movements
11.9.11.8.9 The depth should be decided by considering the bending radius of cable which will be raised from top layer tray. (Please Note: - 600 mm space to be left between bottom of equipment's and top layer of cable tray)
11.9.11.8.10 RCC Cable trench wall thickness should not be less than 150 mm,
All the live and dead loads to be considered in the design calculation accordingly the design to be done. For review and approval purpose all the calculation to be submitted. The minimum required design parameters
11.9.11.8.11
"Trench shall be designed as suitable to
11.9.11.9 General requirements of Cable Trench
11.9.11.9.1 All the metal parts inside the trench shall be connected to the earthing system
11.9.11.9.2 All the frame that shall be used on the cable tray supporting member shall be a hot dip galvanized and firmly embedded with the concreate wall or pillars in the trench
11.9.11.9.3 Cable from trench to equipment's shall run in Hume pipe (NP3) with proper sealing around the Hume pipe.
A suitable clear gap shall be maintained between trench walls and foundations, A clear space (vertical) of at least 300 mm shall be available for each tier in the trench, from the trench bed to lowest tire, a minimum
11.9.11.9.4
clearance of 100 mm shall be available for all tiers
11.9.11.9.5 No sharp bending of cable trench is permissible, it should be done as per cable OD (of highest OD in the group of cable laid through the trench)
The top of trench shall be kept at least 300 mm above finished ground level (FGL). The FGL means the finish level of soil but not top of metalling surface. The top of cable trench shall be such that the surface rain water
11.9.11.9.6
does not enter the trench
The complete length of cable shall be covered with RCC Covers in manner to avoid entry of rain water or others. Also, the bottom surface of complete cable trench shall be designed in a slope of 1/500 along the run and
11.9.11.9.7
1/250 perpendicular to the run to avoid water accumulation in case if it happened. Additionally the water sump pit to be provided at every 20 meters to remove water from the trench.
Cable tray supports (all galvanized) shall be designed and constructed to be a single complete fabrication or assembly such that every layer of the horizontal cable tray supports are fixed, either bolted, or welded to a
11.9.11.9.8
vertical steel support that is embedded in the concrete wall or pillar of the trench. It shall not be permitted to embed a horizontal support directly on brick wall as it could lead a water seepage at later stage
The cable trench crossings of roads should be designed accordingly and to be submitted to BECIS and End-User or any approval authority, all comments from review authority to be complied and considered (The same
11.9.11.9.9
applicable for buried cable, the depth of shall be increased on particular area)
11.10 Transmission line & Its Preferred Arrangements
11.10.1 As defined base don project capacity and requirements the overhead transmission line shall be asked to considered, in case if it is require the contractor should consider the following requirements
11.10.2 The over head line and its transmission arrangement shall verify w.r.t voltage level and current rating however the conductor selection, tower model, and installation method shall be done by considering the following minimum requirements.
11.10.3 The requirements are not only limited to the listed herewith, as per local regulation applicable and necessary requirements shall be incorporated by the contractor if any.
11.10.4 The transmission line specification are only applicable to the internal grid facility at the project location up to the PSS (Power sub-station) within 300 to 500 Meters or nearby the project locations
Where the power transmission line to be installed after the project premises need to comply many regulation and requirements which is specific to the project requirements. By considering the same, a individual documents will be issued by mentioning
11.10.5
the requirements on project specific
11.10.6 OHE Conductors

11.10.6.1 ACSR conductor consisting of a solid or stranded steel core surrounded by strands of aluminium (Electrical conductor grade aluminium 1350-H19alloy or A1). Percentage of steel varying from 6% to 40 % as per approved design

11.10.6.2 While selecting the conductor size, the rated voltage and maximum current on the power transmission shall be considered, it is recommended to design by considering the safety factor 1.50
11.10.6.3 All the conductors shall be supported with proper assembly of insulators. The span and sag shall be considered in the design to avoid inconvenience at later stage. It shall be maintained properly as per the design requirements
Type of insulator (120 kN, 70 kN Composite insulators assembly as per voltage level) and its fixing arrangement shall be done as directed on the relevant standard, applicable regulations, OEM of insulators and BECIS execution team
11.10.6.4
requirements
11.10.6.5 All kind of installation work in the OHE line shall be executed as per the regulation and requirements mentioned in the standard
Additional to the insulator support a complete stretch of conductors on road crossing, river crossing, canal crossings, railway crossings, crossing over LT lines, communication lines, and where the span is more due to un-avoidable
11.10.6.6
obstacles shall have a guarding arrangement just below the conductors to avoid free fall
11.10.6.7 The guarding arrangements shall be designed and executed as per the requirements of the particular locations
11.10.6.8 The conductors and its fixing arrangement shall be designed as per the requirements of bay arrangement at the power evacuation point (at allocated location)
Keeping multiple joints on the OHE line are not recommended, it shall be done with minimum quantity with taking an approval from BECIS execution and design team. Also the joining shall be done in a proper way by ensuring the
11.10.6.9
proper overlapping between the straight or tee conductors
11.10.6.10 The joints and connections of OHE conductors shall be insulated by the sleeves. The connections and joints must be done in manner to avoid the "corona" effect.
Connection between the conductors and terminals of an equipment's like transformer, Air terminals of AB Switch and other applicable shall be done by using the proper connection arrangement as approved and suggested by the
11.10.6.11
BECIS also the OEM of equipment's. Improper connection method will not be accepted
11.10.6.12 All the conductors which will be used on the projects should be inspected by the BECIS team before installation and charging.
It is always recommended to do not keep the joints in-between the poles or on the crossing area. As the tension at these location may be in higher side, which wouldn't be handles by the insulators and other accessories if any. The
11.10.6.13
accessories and insulators on the powerline shall be selected by considering the same.
The higher strength conductors shall be used for river crossings, like road crossing, river crossing, canal crossings, railway crossings, crossing over LT lines, communication lines, and where the span is more due to un-avoidable
11.10.6.14
obstacles
11.10.6.15 All the design summary and calculation shall be submitted by the contractor before proceeding purchase and execution work at site

Following components suitable for selected conductor as per approved design & drawing as per relevant latest IS & IEC standards.

a)Aluminium casting clamps & connectors for string insulation assembly

b)120kN ,70kN Composite insulators assembly as per voltage levels
11.10.6.16 c)Single/Double tension hardware assembly
d)Mid span compression joint
e)Vibration damper
f)Aluminium repair sleeve
g)Hot dipped GI hardware: All type of nut bolts of all sizes ,step bolts, packing washers, spring washers(electrogalvanized)

11.10.7 OHE Tower

While routing the OHE conductor the proper tower or the carrying way shall be designed and installed on the complete stretch of power transmission line. The tower construction shall be done by fulfilling the following minimum
11.10.7.1
requirements but not limited to the listed.
11.10.7.2 The un-listed requirements as per the relevant standard and requirements of Local DISCOM also to be followed by the contractors
11.10.7.3 The type of tower to be selected as per the voltage grade and space availability at the project location
11.10.7.4 It is always recommended to use a single pole assembly up to 33 kV Line when the voltage grade is beyond 33 kV it is recommended to use twin pole kind arrangement with proper civil foundation and arrangement
11.10.7.5 Transmission towers for guyed/self supporting structures for single/double/multiple circuit configurations. Fabrication & supplying of HDGI tower parts, extension tower parts including stub/cleat as per approved design& drawing
11.10.7.6 Whenever the turns and other obstacles have been there on the routing of transmission line it shall be handled with a proper arrangement

Transmission line tower additional material & accessories

a) Overhead shielding earth wire with hardware assembly (flexible copper bond, suspension clamp, tension clamp)
11.10.7.7
b) Pipe type earthing
c) Anticlimbing device
d) Number plate, Phase plate, Circuit plate, Danger plate/board
Document No. IN-EN-MD-001
Page 37 of 37
Technical Specification Rev. 3_Q4-24

Date 28-Oct-24

General Requirements
11.10.7.8 All poles shall have a proper information board with identification of Phases used or connected over. Also, the warning and danger boards with local languages to be fixed on every poles
11.10.7.9 All poles should have a provision to restrict / avoid the unauthorized person climbing to the height.
11.10.7.10 Single Pole
11.10.7.10.1 Based on the requirements the single pole type arrangement shall be used for the installation of transmission line for till the power evacuation point from the generation unit of solar power plant
The complete pole and its relevant accessories, members shall be fabricated from the Mild Steel With galvanization coating in 140 Micron thickness. It is suggested to not use the steel grade which is less than E 450 for
11.10.7.10.2
any members in the tower / Pole of complete transmission line. All the steel to be selected by considering these terms.
11.10.7.10.3 It is permitted to use only solid members for pole and its related configuration i.e., L, I and C Section only approved, hollow sections will not be allowed.
11.10.7.10.4 The steel grade shall be selected as per the requirements of BECIS. However, It is suggested not to use the steel which is less than "E 450" for pole and its related accessories
11.10.7.10.5 As mentioned earlier the type of pole and height of installation shall be done as per the rating of transmission voltage and by considering the local body (i.e., DISCO requirement)

11.10.7.10.6 There should be a proper installation arrangement for the single pole generally Half of the height shall be grouted in below the ground i.e., below FGL. The total height of the pole to be selected by considering the same

All the turning and cross connection on the transmission line shall be done by installation proper arrangement to sustain the pull load of OHE Conductors, i.e., load bearing pole to be installed & with proper supporting
11.10.7.10.7
arrangements
11.10.7.10.8 The pole to be selected with have an arrangement which could be used by the lineman while repair work occurs on the line
11.10.7.10.9 Complete pole shall be a galvanized Mile steel, the galvanization shall be done more than 140 Microns, or as per the requirements of BECIS by considering the project requirements
11.10.7.10.10 All kind of installation arrangement like drilling, bending's and further fabrication shall be done at the factory before galvanization. It is applicable to the pole and its related accessories
11.10.7.10.11 There should a arrangement on top to fix the insulators with hardware's. The hole or the provision for insulator installation shall be provided in a extra which can be used in case of emergency requirements
There should a proper grounding arrangement for all the metal parts connected on the pole, which must be connected with ground by using a proper discharge way /arrangement as directed by the BECIS or local body
11.10.7.10.12
(i.e., DISCOM requirements)
11.10.7.10.13 When there is a 90 deg turning the junction or the turning location shall be supported with twin pole with an proper installation arrangement of insulators in both direction
11.10.7.10.14 When there is offset turning on the line it shall be installed with the triple pole arrangement with proper installation arrangement of insulation in required direction
11.10.7.10.15 The pole shall be designated in such a way, there shall be a provision for future expansion in case if require
11.10.7.10.16 All the insulators to be installed on the a metal frame and the frame shall be connected with pole by using an proper fixing hardware's (i.e., U Clamps and fasteners)
11.10.7.10.17 The frame where the conductors' insulator fixed shall be supported with a bracing where the cantilever support provided and location where load bearing is required
11.10.7.10.18 The frame and its related accessories also a galvanized, Mild Steel material with 140 Micron thickness of galvanization
The sections which will be used on the pole shall be selected by considering the actual loads, like, dead load, wind load, sag load, weight of conductors (laid length) force due to the span between poles and etc as per
11.10.7.10.19
details design calculation
The structural joints will not be allowed if it is done by deviating from an approved drawing, All the joints should be done as approved by the BECIS. In total, only 5% of poles with joints allowed, the contractor shall
11.10.7.10.20
be planned by considering these requirements in priorly
11.10.7.10.21 All the calculation shall be submitted for the review and approval purpose of BECIS
The distance between the pole shall be done as per the requirement by considering the sag and line pressure due to the conductor. It should not be going beyond the approved limit. In case if it is going the proper
11.10.7.10.22
approval shall be taken from BECIS by submitting the GA and design calculations
11.10.7.10.23 As per the approval all the up normal span poles to be installed, and losses due to the span changes to be incorporated in all kind of design calculations
Single pole arrangements will not be allowed at the location where the crossing to be done like road crossing, river crossing, canal crossings, railway crossings, crossing over LT lines, communication lines, and where
11.10.7.10.24
the span is more due to un-avoidable obstacles
11.10.7.10.25 The crossing arrangements should be done with the twin pole or multiple configurations with a proper supporting arrangements in manner to mechanical support as well civil installations
11.10.7.11 Multi Pole
11.10.7.11.1 The multipole configuration shall be considered as per the requirements of project and specific design any
The complete pole and its relevant accessories, members shall be fabricated from the Mild Steel With galvanization coating in 140 Micron thickness. It is suggested to not use the steel grade which is less than E 450 for
11.10.7.11.2
any members in the tower / Pole of complete transmission line. All the steel to be selected by considering these terms.
11.10.7.11.3 It is permitted to use only solid members for pole and its related configuration i.e., L, I and C Section only approved, hollow sections will not be allowed.
11.10.7.11.4 The complete arrangements shall be installed in a proper civil foundations with a supporting poles and arrangements wherever required on the routing of conductors.
11.10.7.11.5 The grounding arrangement of all metal parts in the pole shall be done with a proper and approve mechanism of BECIS
11.10.7.11.6 All the insulators shall be fixed with pole by as per the requirement of routing of conductors in entire routing, the necessary arrangement shall be done during fabrication stage
11.10.7.11.7 All kind of installation arrangement like drilling, bending's and further fabrication shall be done at the factory before galvanization. It is applicable to the pole and its related accessories
11.10.7.11.8 All the connections /joints in the multi pole installation is preferred to have a removeable hardware in GI material with suitable size as per the requirements of load carrying
11.10.7.11.9 The joints on the poles and its related accessories shall be done by using the suitable members as per the requirements based on the design calculation.

11.10.7.11.10 All design calculation which being used for the selection and designing of pole to be submitted by review and approval of BECIS based on the approval contractor should proceed further stages on towards execution

The distance between the pole shall be done as per the requirement by considering the sag and line pressure due to the conductor. It should not be going beyond the approved limit. In case if it is going the proper
11.10.7.11.11
approval shall be taken from BECIS by submitting the GA and design calculations
11.10.7.11.12 As per the approval all the up normal span poles to be installed, and losses due to the span changes to be incorporated in all kind of design calculations
11.10.7.11.13 When there is a 90 deg turning the junction or the turning location shall be supported with twin pole with an proper installation arrangement of insulators in both direction
11.10.7.11.14 When there is offset turning on the line it shall be installed with the triple pole arrangement with proper installation arrangement of insulation in required direction
11.10.7.11.15 The pole shall be designated in such a way, there shall be a provision for future expansion in case if require
11.10.7.11.16 All the insulators to be installed on the a metal frame and the frame shall be connected with pole by using an proper fixing hardware's (i.e., U Clamps and fasteners)
11.10.7.11.17 The frame where the conductors' insulator fixed shall be supported with a bracing where the cantilever support provided and location where load bearing is required
11.10.7.11.18 The frame and its related accessories also a galvanized, Mild Steel material with 140 Micron thickness of galvanization
The sections which will be used on the pole shall be selected by considering the actual loads, like, dead load, wind load, sag load, weight of conductors (laid length) force due to the span between poles and etc as per
11.10.7.11.19
details design calculation
The structural joints will not be allowed if it is done by deviating from an approved drawing, All the joints should be done as approved by the BECIS. In total, only 5% of poles with joints allowed, the contractor shall
11.10.7.11.20
be planned by considering these requirements in priorly
11.10.7.11.21 All the calculation shall be submitted for the review and approval purpose of BECIS